Home

User`s Manual of Layer 2 Management 802.3at PoE Switch

1. Drop DM am 2 O O Drop O O Drop O c Drop O O ff ff f tf ff ff f f Drop ff ff O O Drop Off Off Drop Ott Of Drop O O 1000 1000 1000 1000 i Drop 100001 1000 ff Off O Of ff ff ff if Drop Off f f Drop GE17 Off 10000 off 1000 Off 1000 GE18 Off 10000 Of 1000 oy 000 orum or acne ET Off 10000 Off 10000 Off 10000 oe 1000 orco or 00 orco Drop Fe o Fee C qo 0 AA C AS 4 o AS OJO a MA MAS MA o MI ae 7 OJO Come ARA c AOS TNA go 6 ASA 7 AS 7 Pid Off 1000 Drop or qm Off 10000 Figure 4 9 4 Storm Control Information Page Screenshot 194 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Port State Display the current port state e Broadcast 16Kbps Display the current brocast storm control rate e Unknown Multicast Display the current unknown multicast storm control rate 16Kbps e Unknown Unicast Display the current unknown unicast storm control rate 16Kbps e Action Display the current action 4 9 2 802 1X Overview of 802 1X Port based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the auth
2. PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual 24 Port 10 100 1000T 802 3at PoE 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch gt GS 4210 24P2S VEE EFE TETE Tl Www PLANET com tw User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2014 Contents are subject to revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplet
3. Information Name Information Value HTTPS Service Dis abled Figure 4 9 52 HT TPs Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e HTTPs Service e Login Authentication List e Session Timeout Description Display the current HTTPs service information Display the current login authentication list information Display the current session timeout information 237 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 10 ACL ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and den
4. PoE Delay Settings Port Select Delay Mode Delay Time Select Ports Enabled O Disabled O 0 300 Sec Button Apply The page includes Apply Figure 4 14 4 PoE Delay Setting Page Screenshot Click to apply changes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e Delay Mode Disable or enable delay mode e Delay Time Allow assign delay time to the PoE Managed Switch The range is 0 300 seconds 287 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S POE Delay Status q Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable TERT B G G G2 Ga ETE a O01 tn Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 4 14 5 PoE Delay Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Delay Mode Display per port delay mode status e Delay Time Second Display per port delay time setting information 288 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 14 4 Power over Ethernet Powered Device 3 5 Watts 6 12 Watts 10 12 Watts 3 12 Watts 3 25 Watts 30 Watts Voice over IP phones Enterprise can install POE VolP Phone ATA and other Ethernet non Ethernet end devices to the central where UPS is installed for un interrupt power system and power cont
5. Query Max Response Interval sec Immediate Leave Robustness Interval sec Figure 4 7 9 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot Object Description e Entry No Display the current entry number e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID IGMP Snooping Operation Status Router Ports Auto Learn Query Robustness Query Interval sec Query Max Response Interval sec Last Member Query conut Last Member Query Interval sec Immediate Leave Modity Display the current IGMP snooping operation status Display the current router ports auto learning Display the current query robustness Display the current query interval Display the current query max response interval Display the current last member query count Display the current last member query interval Display the current immediate leave E dit Click to edit parameter 148 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 7 2 2 IGMP Querier Setting This page provides IGMP Querier Setting The IGMP Querier Setting screens in Figure 4 7 10 amp Figure 4 7 11 appear IGMP Snooping Querier Setting IGMP Querier Setting VLAN ID Select VLANs Querier State Disable U Enable Querier Version yo v3 Apply Figure 4 7 10 IGMP VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID for this drop down list e Querier State Enable or disable the querier state The default value i
6. The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Select VLAN ID for this drop down list e Group IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Ports Select port number for this drop down list Button Add Click to add IGMP router port entry 150 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S IGMP Static Groups Figure 4 7 13 IGMP Static Groups Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e VLANID e Group IP Address e Member Ports e Modify 4 7 2 4 IGMP Group Table Description Display the current VLAN ID Display the current group IP address Display the current member ports Click Edit to edit parameter This page provides Multicast Database The IGMP Group Table screen in Figure 4 7 14 appears IGMP Group Table Figure 4 7 14 IGMP Group Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e VLAN ID e Group IP Address e Member Ports e Type e Life Sec Description Display the current VID Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service Display the current member port Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic depending on selected options Display the current life 151 4 7 2 5 IGMP Router Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast
7. dot3Stat eMultipleC ollisionF rame s dotsStatsD eferredTransmis sions dot35tatsLate Callisians dotsStatsExcessiveCollisions dot3StatsF rameTaoLangs dot32tats2 ymbalErrars dotStontrollnUnknownOpcode s daot3lnPauseFrames dot 30 utPauseFrames MIB Counter Value Figure 4 3 5 Ethernet link Counters Page Screenshot Object dot3StatsAlignmentErrors dot3StatsFCSErrors dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions dot3StatsLateCollisions dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions dot3StatsFrameTooLongs dot3StatsSymbolErrors dot3ControllnUnknownOpcodes dot3InPauseFrames dot30utPauseFrames Description The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission isinhibited by exactly one collision A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particularinterface is delayed because the medium was busy The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet A count of frames for which transmissi
8. iflnOctaete ilni c astPkts fln ea stP kt s iflnDiscards f ntOct ets f nuthiloastPkts if utDiscards iflnhldulticastPkts iflnBroadcastPkts ifQuthlulticastPkts fOutBroadcastP kts Figure 4 3 4 Interface Counters Page Screenshot 74 Object ifinOctets Received Octets ifinUcastPkts Received Unicast Packets ifinNUcastPkts Received Nuknown Unicast Packets iflnDiscards Received Discards Packets ifOutOctets Transmit Octets ifOutUcastPkts Transmit Unicast Packets ifOutNUcastPkts Transmit Nuknown Unicast Packets ifOutDiscards Transmit Discards Packets ifinMulticastPkts Received Multicast Packets ifinBroadcastPkts Received Broadcast Packets ifOutMulticastPkts Transmit Multicast Packets ifOutBroadcastPkts Transmit Broadcast Packets User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol The number of packets received via the interfaces which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface includ
9. 93 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S LACP Port Information GE1 1 Long GEZ 1 Long GE3 1 Long GE4 1 Long GES 1 Long GEB 1 Long GE 1 Long GES 1 Long GES 1 Long GE10 1 Long GE11 1 Long DEIZ 1 Long GE13 1 Long GE14 1 Long GE15 1 Long GE16 1 Long GE17 1 Long GE18 1 Long GE18 1 Long GE20 1 Long GE21 1 Long GE22 1 Long GE23 1 Long GE24 1 Long GE25 1 Long GE26 1 Long Figure 4 4 11 LACP Port Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Priority Display the current LACP priority parameter e Timeout Display the current timeout parameter 4 4 6 LAG Status This page displays LAG status The LAG Status screens in Figure 4 4 12 amp Figure 4 4 13 appear LAG Status LAG Status pe fare A vez me OO Las JN Pent E RE ue e qum OO O SSS SSS vem CC p 00 O ue wem A vm p wmm ES LL Figure 4 4 12 LAG Status Page Screenshot 94 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Display the current trunk entry e Name Display the current LAG name e Type Display the current trunk type e Link State Display the current link state e Active Member Display the current active member e Standby Member Display the current standby member Y LACP Information key mee Pun astme STO
10. Excluded Tagged Untagged GE2 Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged GES GE6 Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged GE Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged VLAN ID 2 Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 amp 7 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID a es Hybrid S O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged Jee ha O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged VLAN ID 3 Port 4 8 5 Untagged Port 6 amp 7 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded v Port to VLAN Settings VIANID 3 GEb Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged Se Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged PRA 117 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 6 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 6 1 Theory The Spanning Tree Protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions 5 STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D m RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w E MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 15s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w R
11. None Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes 05 Information Figure 4 8 14 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Display the current QoS mode 174 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 3 2 Port Settings The QoS Port Setting and Status screen in Figure 4 8 15 8 Figure 4 8 16 appear QoS Port Setting QoS Port Setting Select Ports Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 8 15 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number for this drop down list e Trust Mode Enable or disable the trust mode Button Apply Click to apply changes 175 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 05 Port Status Figure 4 8 16 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Trust Mode Display the current trust type 176 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 4 QoS Advanced Mode 4 8 4 1 Global Settings The Advanced Mode Global Settings and QoS Information screen in Figure 4 8 17 amp Figure 4 8 18 appear Global Settings Advanced Mode Global Settings Cnp amp 8i802 1p DSCcP C 09i802 1p DS CP F Precedence Trusted Mat Trusted Apply Figure 4 8 17 Advanced Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object
12. Ros Delete the access group entry 62 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 6 5 SNMP Community Configure SNMP Community on this page The SNMP Community screens in Figure 4 2 25 Figure 4 2 26 appear SNMP Community Community Setting Community Name Community Mode Group Name View Name Access Right Add Figure 4 2 25 Community Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Community Name Indicates the community read write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 16 e Community Mode Indicates the SNMP community supported mode Possible versions are B Basic Set SNMP community mode supported version 1 and 2c B Advanced Set SNMP community mode supported version 3 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Access Right Indicates the SNMP community type operation Possible types are RO Read Only Set access string type in read only mode RW Read Write Set access string type in read write mode Button Add Click to add a new community name p e lem Figure 4 2 26 Community Status Page Screenshot 63 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Community Name Display
13. Single If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE you can enter a specific destiantino port value A field for entering a destiantino port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination port value Range If you want to filter a specific destiantion port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific destiantion port range value A field for entering a destination port value appears Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the Urg field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the Urg field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the Ack field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the Ack field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the Psh field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the Psh field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the Rst field is set must be able to match this entry
14. The total number of packets received and transmitted on the interface The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS T etherStatsCollisions etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to1270ctets etherStatsPkts128to255O0ctets etherStatsPkts256to5110ctets etherStatsPkts512to10230ctets etherStatsPkts1024to15180ctets User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S or alignment error The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but includin
15. e Action Disaply the current action information 4 8 4 4 Policy Table The QoS Policy table and Policy table status screen in Figure 4 8 23 amp Figure 4 8 24 appear Policy Configuration Policy Configuration Add Figure 4 8 23 QoS Policy Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Policy Name Input the policy name and 31 characters allowed Button Add Click to add policy profile entry Policy Table Figure 4 8 24 QoS Policy Table Page Screenshot 180 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Policy Name Display the current policy name e Delete EI Click Delete to delete the policy name profile entry 4 8 4 5 Policy Class Maps The QoS policy class maps and policy class maps status screen in Figure 4 8 25 amp Figure 4 8 26 appear Policy Class Maps Policy Class Configuration e Trust Mone C Always Trust CO Gat Queue None Single O Aggregate 16 kBits s 128 Bytes Forward Drap Add Figure 4 8 25 QoS Policy Class Maps Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Policy Name Allow choose one specific policy name e Class Name Allow choose one specific class name e Action Type Provide Trust None Always Trust and Set Queue oprtions e Police Type Provide None Single and Aggregate options
16. o Emm pm e Emm pm CC Eme pm e Eee eo ooo er pm e em pm o Eme pm e Emm o o Emm o a Em o oo m CNN m CNN m po m CEN mo po m CEN ort GE Mode pps 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled 802 1 Disabled Oy Go Gs Gy Ga Ga Ga ga Y m m m mi m j imi mm mo oo sy om om ee od Bo a m 10 8021 Disabled i ITI c 902 14 Disabled a m 12 8021 Disabled a m 13 2802 14 Disabled a m 1 Ix 902 14 Disabled a m 1 um oo 02 14 Disabled 16 602 14 Disabled El oo 02 14 Disabled 18 602 14 Disabled ca 02 14 Disabled 20 602 14 Disabled 21 902 14 Disabled 22 802 1x Disabled 23 8021 Disabled 24 60214 Disabled 25 8021 Disabled tu a 3l 3l 3l 3l a0 3l 3l 3l 3l 3l 3l 3l 3l 30 3l 30 3l 30 3l 3l 3l 3l 3l alll 0 GE26 802 14 Disabled E Or Gy Ga Oy na Ga Gs 56 na Q ITI ITI Mm Mm my my my m m cm fe oo bo oo oo oo Figure 4 9 10 802 1X Port Status Page Screenshot 201 The page includes the following fields User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Mode pps Display the current mode e Status pps Display the current status e Periodic Displa
17. 2006 A 1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2013 EN 55024 2010 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 A 1 2007 A2 2010 IEC 61000 4 4 2012 IEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2013 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer L Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 15 Aug 2014 Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
18. ASS LAN ESI 208 ASAP SONG aan ETE E OO TIT PES 210 AS DS ES PR NE D Hc c T REC ER RE NS 212 ALO 3 Orato nn eme DER 213 19 31 Optiong2 Global Selling i opor ia 215 49 3 9 Oplions2 POrE CUINA A ATA AS Ue AAA AA dM ED LA De cdd 216 24 9 5 9 Optonoz CITGult ID Se CNG clas ses cae oed vs Cres ete A EOE axa Pcr aed 218 EP 219 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S AIDA a ca a a al do a o a O le Ma O ated 222 AS A xTM 223 a A A 224 Aid ACCOUA TINO boat iii dis 225 Hes A ACCOUMUNG Update mee M E 226 IO TAGAGS T SCIVEN iaa ls dica 227 AI RADIUS Selassie a S 229 5s N RC 232 AS GON ear do er o a 232 A WONG coxa A A 234 2 99 ATE tni dit RED A 236 GS aoi s E Sects NA IR RENS ate hte IRR RENATO I EEE E EEE IEN tase E ETE A E EER EE EEEE NEAT 237 O A AUN EN S SOOO RE RNNUUENUN e ENERO LISTE IRE 238 ATOM MAC Based AC MT 238 ATOZ MAGC Based ACE S 239 A ac sts M 242 A OSAP VA Based ACE scabs PEE 243 4 195 AC UA 91 012 eae PE re eI aE aN de da dales 248 4 1T MAC Address TA iaa 249 zen Mec d o a dl dl a dd td a id o O 249 2 11 2 NUNG FMEGFIFIO tail das di dd ds ad Ps LIE e 250 ATS Dynamic Address SC ING rss aR 251 BN CE AAA IA A A doa SO a did 252 4 11 5 RAMAS UU Nici es he ee a ad a Sac NN a ct AN le a eh at ata 253 O A O 255 212 1
19. Both Port Mirrorin i Many to 1 monitor 18 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 802 1Q tagged based VLAN Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Protocol VLAN IEEE 802 3ad LACP supports 8 groups of 16 port trunk and static trunk supports 8 groups of 8 port trunk Spanning Tree Protocol STP RSTP MSTP IGMP v2 v3 Snooping IGMP Querier Up to 256 multicast groups Access Control List IPv4 IP based ACL MAC based ACL IPv4 IP based ACE MAC based ACE 8 mapping ID to 8 level priority queues Port Number 802 1p priority DSCP field in IP Packet Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR IEEE 802 1X port based authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with RADIUS server RADIUS TACACS user access authentication MAC filter Static MAC address DHCP Snooping and DHCP Option82 STP BPDU Guard BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding Link Aggregation Security Management Functions RJ45 Console Web browser Telnet SNMP v1 v2c v3 Firmware upgrade by HTTP TFTP protocol through Ethernet network Remote Local Syslog Basic Management Interfaces System log LLDP protocol SNTP Secure Management Interfaces HTTPs SNMP v3 RFC 3635 Ethernet like MIB RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB RFC 2819 RMON 1 2 3 9 RFC 1493 Bridge MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX
20. Chassis ID 00 30 4P 4F FF 51 system Name 35 42 10 24P25 system Description Figure 4 12 7 Local Device Summary Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Chassis ID Subtype Display the current chassis ID subtype e Chassis ID Display the current chassis ID e System Name Display the current system name e System Description Display the current system description e Capabilities Supported Display the current capabilities supported e Capabilities Enabled Display the current capabilities enabled e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID subtype 262 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Detail Figure 4 12 8 Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e LLDP Status Display the current LLDP status e LLDP MED Status Display the current LLDP MED Status Detail press the Detail button then the following detail LLDP Local Device Detail information appears Press Back button for back to previous Port Status screen The Global Information screens in Figure 4 12 9 appear LLDP Local Device Detail Information LLDP Port Detail Local Information Back We SSS supported System Capabilities Bridge AS Management Address Figure 4 12 9 Global Information Page Screenshot 263 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields
21. DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN e When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed e Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or firewall to trusted state Set all other ports outside the local network or firewall to untrusted state The DHCP Snooping Port Setting screen in Figure 4 9 18 amp Figure 4 9 19 appears DHCP Snooping Port Setting DHCP Snooping Port Setting Select Ports Un Trusted Trusted Enable Disable Apply Figure 4 9 18 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e Type Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Default mode is Untrusted and possible modes are B Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message B Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message e Chaddr Check Indicates that the Chaddr check function is enabled on selected port Chadar Client hardware address Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes 210 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S DHCP Snooping Port Setting Figure 4 9 19 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Type Display the current type
22. Kbps Configure the CIR for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 must a multiple of 16 Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 190 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Egress Queue Burst Size Configuration Figure 4 8 38 Egress Port Burst Size Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Burst Size Display current burst size information GE1 Egress Per Queue Status 0 A 0 E A O Figure 4 8 39 Egress Queue Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Queue ID Display the current queue ID e Rate Limit Kbps Display the current rate limit 191 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 Security This section is to control the access of the PoE Managed Switch including the user access and management control The Security Page contains links to the following main topics a Strom Control 802 1x DHCP Snooping Port Security AAA TACACS Server Radius Server Access 4 9 1 Storm Control Storm control for the switch is configured on this Page There is an unknown unicast storm rate control unknown multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table 4 9 1 1 Global Setting The Storm Control Global Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 1 amp Figure 4 9 2
23. M n 338 TI FOrWardino Se Ele is fewer eced cea peed dean actos eoseeincecsses dacecnied Goeeeenreiede ciel eeees 338 TASA ie 338 LO AUTO NegO Malo iii a A ii 340 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW cccccsseceeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeenseseesesoesesensesensesenss 341 mapn iej clc ejergLcm e aaa 343 APRENDI Aoc 344 A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base Toonooonnnnanccccnncconncccanccnoncnnnnananancnnnnananannnnnennnnnas 344 AZ 10 TOOMDDS 10 100B4 S6 p S 344 11 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing PLANET 24 Port 10 100 1000T 802 3at PoE 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch GS 4210 24P2S PoE Managed Switch mentioned in this Guide refers to the GS 4210 24P2S 1 1 Package Contents Open the box of the PoE Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items The PoE Managed Switch x 1 Quick Installation Guide x 1 Rubber Feet x 4 Power Cord x 1 RS 232 to RJ 45 Console Cable x 1 SFP Dust Cap x 2 Rack mount Accessory Kit x 1 If any item is found missing or damaged please contact your local reseller for replacement 12 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 1 2 Product Description Cost Optimized Managed PoE Switch for Small and Medium Businesses PLANET GS 4210 24P2S is an ideal Gigabit PoE Switch which provides cost effective advantage to local area network and is widely accepted in the SMB office net
24. MAC Based ACE Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e ACL Name e Sequence e Action e Destination MAC Address e Destination Wildcard Mask e Source MAC Address e Source Wildcard Mask e VLANID e 802 1p e 802 1p Mask e Ethertype e Modify Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current destination MAC address Display the current destination wildcard mask Display the current source MAC address Display the current source wildcard mask Display the current VLAN ID Display the current 802 1p value Display the current 802 1p mask value Display the current Ethernet type E dit Click to edit MAC Based ACE parameter Click Delete delete MAC Based ACE entry 241 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 10 3 IPv4 Based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Pv4 Based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 5 amp Figure 4 10 6 appear IPv4 Based ACL IPv4 Based ACL ACL Name Add Figure 4 10 5 IPv4 Based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a named IPv4 based ACL list Button Add l l Click to add IPv4 Based ACL name list ACL Table Figure 4 10 6 IPv4 Based ACL Table Pag
25. Policy Binding Policy Select Binding Port Select Ports x Apply Figure 4 8 27 QoS Policy Binding Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Policy Select Select policy from this drop down list e Binding Port Select one specific port from this drop down list Button Apply Click to apply changes 183 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Policy Binding Table Figure 4 8 28 QoS Policy Binding Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Disaply per port information e Policy Name Display the current policy name information 184 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 5 Rate Limit Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page 4 8 5 1 Ingress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 29 amp Figure 4 8 30 8 Figure 4 8 31 appear Ingress Bandwidth Control Ingress Port Burst Setting 1 65535 unit Byte Rate Kbps Select Ports WS Disable Enable 0 1 000000 must a multiple of 15 Apply Figure 4 8 29 Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Burst Size Allow assigning burst size and the options are 1 to 65535 Unit Bytes e Port Select port number for this drop down list e State Enable or disabl
26. Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port C Designated Bridge 8 LAN2 8 amp AN3 _ gt Figure 4 6 3 After Applying the STA Rules 123 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link This section has the following items 5 STP Global Setting Configures STP system settings a STP Port Setting Configuration per port STP settings E CIST Instance Setting Configure system configuration n CIST Port Setting Configure CIST port setting B MST Instance Setting Configuration each MST instance settings E MST Port Setting Configuration per port MST setting E STP Statistics Display the STP statistics 4 6 2 STP Global Settings This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch The PoE Managed Switch support the follow
27. SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight through and Crossover Cable SIDE 2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above table before deploying the cables into your network 345 J PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Confomti For the following equipment Type of Product 24 Port 10 100 1000T 802 3at PoE 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch Model Number gt GS 4210 24P2S Produced by Manufacturer s Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 2010 AC 2011 EN 61000 3 2
28. SNMP information Syntax snmp community Set community or security name string engineid SNMP engine id setting group Set access group string host Trap or inform host trap Snmp class trap setting user Set user Settings view Set view string 6 3 36 sntp Command Description Simple Network Time Protocol Syntax sntp host 6 3 37 spanning tree Command Description Spanning tree configuration Syntax Spanning tree User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S bpdu action for bpdu packet forward delay Sets the forward delay parameter hello time Sets the hello time parameter max hops Sets the max hops parameter maximum age Changes the interval between messages the spanning tree receive s from the root switch mode Spanning tree protocol type mst Multiple spanning tree configuration pathcost Spanning tree path cost method priority Sets the priority for specified instance tx hold count Set spanning tree tx hold count in seconds 6 3 38 storm control Command Description Storm control configuration Syntax Storm control ifg Interframe configuration unit Unit configuration 6 3 39 system Command Description System information Syntax contact Set host contact location Set host location name Set host name 6 3 40 tacacs Command Description TACACS server information Syntax tacacs default config TACACS server default parameters host TACACS server host 6 3 41 udld Command Description C
29. client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options B Circuit ID option 1 B Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan id module id port no The parameter of vlan id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in switch it means switch ID The parameter of port no is the fourth byte and it means the port number After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 23 amp Figure 4 9 24 appear DHCP Option32 Global Setting Option82 Global Setting Remote ID 2 Default Liser Define Apply Figure 4 9 23 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote ID Set the option2 remote ID option content of option
30. e Aggregate Police Allow choose one specific aggregate police profile e Ingress Committed Allow input a number as ingress committed information rate 181 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Information Rate CIR e Ingress Committed Allow input a number as ingress committed burst size Burst Size CBS e Exceed Action Choose Forward or Drop when the exceed action situation appears Button Add Click to add policy class maps profile entry Action Type Policy Name Class Name Police Type Aggregate Police Name CIR CBS Exceed Action Modify Figure 4 8 26 QoS Policy Class Map Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Policy Name Display the current policy name information e Class Name Disaply the current class name information e Action Type Disaply current Trust Set Attribute and Set Value information e Police Type Display current policy type information e Aggregate Police Display current Aggregate Police Name information Name e CIR Display current CIR information e CBS Display current CBS information e Exceed Action Display current exceed action information e Modify Click Edit to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the policy class maps profile entry 182 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 4 6 Policy Binding The QoS policy binding and policy bidning table screen in Figure 4 8 27 4 Figure 4 8 28 appear Policy Bin ding
31. e Chaddr Check Display the current chaddr check 211 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 3 5 Statistics The DHCP Snooping Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 20 appears DHCP Snooping Statistics DHCP Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Figure 4 9 20 DHCP Snooping Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Forwarded Display the current forwarded e Chaddr Check Dropped Display the chaddr check dropped e Untrust Port Dropped Display untrust port dropped 212 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S e Untrust Port with Display untrust port with option82 dropped Option82 Dropped e Invaild Dropped Display invalid dropped Buttons Clear l Click to clear the statistics Refresh l I Click to refresh the statistics 4 9 3 6 Rate Limit After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 21 amp Figure 4 9 22 appear DHCP Rate Limit DHCP Rate Limit Setting Select Ports 2 Default Liser Oefine Unlimited 1 50 pps Apply Figure 4 9 21 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e State Set default or user define e Rate Limit pps Configure the rate limit for the port policer The
32. e DHCP Rate Limit Display the current DHCP rate limit status e ARP Rate Limt Display the current ARP rate limit status 4 3 7 Port Error Disabled Status This page provides disable that transitions a port into error disable and the recovery options The ports were disabled by some protocols such as BPDU Guard Loopback and UDLD The Port Error Disable screen in Figure 4 3 15 appears Port Error Disabled Status Error Disabled Reason Time Left Se con ds Figure 4 3 15 Port Error Disable Status Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port Name Displays the port for error disable status e Error Disabled Reason Display the error disabled reason of the port e Time Left Seconds Display the time left in seconds User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 4 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system
33. om mh S N Ne m COMO Im m Je s ona ee o m IN m m oem emme CO m Nm m m CEM TIMO o m IN Na m oni em CO AA m m m ora Eme o e IN a res ons ee o m m m ons pe d Jm m m es CT TOO O AA m m m ons pae p e IN I res ona emme OS AA Nm m m om Eme o e IN a es CTO O Jm m IN m o pe o Jm IN a es oes emme O Jm IN I m oe Emme o e IN a res oes emme ho JN NS O e TOO CO Jm IN II DA Loi Eme Jm TORA e ms Lo Eae m Ne e es Loc Eee Nm Ne e s Lc Eme e IN NS es Los m D m DN e ms Los me O m Nw m m Lor maa D w lw J m Los jme p w jw jm m Figure 4 6 7 STP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Admin Enable Display the current STP port mode status e External Cost Display the current external cost e Edge Port Display the current edge port status e BPDUFilter Display the current BPDU filter configuration e BPDU Guard Display the current BPDU guard configuration e P2P MAC Display the current P2P MAC status 128 4 6 4 CIST Instance Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S This Page allows you to configure
34. time Display the current SNTP state Display the current time zone Display the current daylight saving time state Display the current daylight saving time offset state Display the current daylight saving time from Display the current daylight saving time to 90 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 4 2 SNTP Configuration The SNTP Server Configuration screens in Figure 4 2 8 amp Figure 4 2 9 appear SNTP Server Settings SNTP Server Settings Server Port 1 65535 Default 123 Apply Figure 4 2 8 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNTP NTP Server Address Type the IP address or domain name of the SNTP NTP server e Server Port Type the port number of the server port Options 1 65535 Default 123 Button Apply Click to apply changes SNTP Server Information Figure 4 2 9 SNTP Server Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNTP Server Address Display the current SNTP server address e SNTP Server Port Display the current SNTP server port 91 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 5 Log Management The PoE Managed Switch log management is provided here The local logs allow you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels O to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM The following table l
35. 192 168 0 100 icmp_seq 2 ttl 64 time 0 0 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 100 icmp_seq 3 ttl 64 time 0 0 ms 192 168 0 100 ping statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip min avg max 0 0 0 0 0 0 ms GS 4210 24P2S gt 6 2 12 reboot command Description Halt and perform a cold restart Syntax reboot Example GS 4210 24P2S reboot Jul 03 14 22 09 System 4 System reboot 6 2 13 renew command Description RenewlP configuration Syntax renew ip dhcp snooping database Example GS 4210 24P2S renew ip dhcp snooping database GS 4210 24P2S 322 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 14 restore defaults command Description Restore to default Syntax restore defaults Example GS 4210 24P2S restore defaults Restore Default Success Do you want to reboot now y n y Rebooting now Jan 01 08 16 00 System 4 System reboot 6 2 15 save command Description Save running configuration to flash Syntax save Example GS 4210 24P2S save Success GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 16 show command Description Show running system information Syntax show specific item Example GS 4210 24P2S show version Loader Version 2011 12 41872 Loader Date May 22 2014 19 28 43 Firmware Version v1 0b140611 Firmware Date Wed Jun 11 10 13 28 CST 2014 Magic Number 83800000 GS 4210 24P2S 323 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2
36. 192 168 1 254 307 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S GS 4210 24P25H show ip IP Address 192 168 4 160 Subnet Netmask 299 299 299 0 De Ta M au 192 168 8 2754 G54210 24P28 8 configure GS 4210 24P2S confia ip address 192 168 1 1808 mask 255 255 255 8 GS 4210 24P2S config H ip defaull gateway 192 168 1 254 GS 4210 24P2S conf 1g9 8 Figure 5 3 Setting IP Address Screen 5 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed If the IP is successfully configured the PoE Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of PoE Managed Switch through the new IP address If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter anytime in console to get the help description 5 2 Telnet Login The PoE Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The PoE Managed Switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for username amp password cy of x Switch Command Line Interface Version vi hhi46611 gt Username admin Password sx 5 421H 24P251 Figure 5 4 Telnet Login Screen 308 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Mode based Comman
37. 5 Untagged Port 6 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded 114 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Port to VLAN Settings VLANID 3 M Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged se um O Fen O enced O Tome Suns A 4 5 9 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch The most cases are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 5 12 appears rE EE HE See ee ee U PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Tagged FEE cm ESP E 5 ES ESET ESS SS SSS Se PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged m as as A uS A am am 4 E Ee M 802 1Q Trunking VLAN 2 VLAN 3 PC 1 Untagged bk m m me c SS s SS eS See ee PC 4 Untagged SSS SP o A a ha A A as a A AA A A as A D A aes o aes A A A A A o o aaa aa ee SS l L L L I 115 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Setup steps Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VLAN Table FF ee Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 Port 7 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 1 Port VLAN Status oe fae Rp jm sm mu p S fe h oj VLAN ID 1 Port 1 6 Untagged Port 7 Excluded 116 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Port to VLAN Settings vano GE1 Hybrid O Forbidden
38. 65535 gt LACP system priority 6 3 21 lag Command Description Link Aggregation Group Configuration Syntax lag load balance src dst mac src dst mac ip 6 3 22 line Command Description To identify a specific line for configuration Syntax line console ssh telnet 331 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 3 23 lldp Command Description LLDP Configuration Syntax lldp holdtime multiplier Configure LLDP holdtime multiplier lldpdu Configure LLDP PDU handling when LLDP is disabled med LLDP MED configuration reinit delay Configure LLDP reinitialization delay tx delay Configure LLDP TX delay tx interval Configure LLDP transmission interval 6 3 24 logging Command Description Log Configuration Syntax logging buffered RAM flash Flash host Remote syslog host 6 3 25 mac Command Description MAC Configuration Syntax mac acl This command enters the extended MAC ACL configuration in order to create layer 2 extended ACL address table MAC address table configuration 6 3 26 management VLAN Command Description Management VLAN configuration Syntax management vlan vlan lt 1 4094 gt VLAN ID e g 100 332 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 3 27 mirror Command Description Mirror configuration Syntax mirror session lt 1 4 gt Session ID e g 1 4 configuraton destination source interface GigabitEthernet lt 1 26 gt GigabitEthernet
39. Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list the available length is 31 characters e Method 1 4 Set the login authentication method Empty None Local TACACS RADIUS Enable Default mode is Empty Button Add l TE Click to add authentication list M Login Authentication Lists a e Figure 4 9 32 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 223 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 5 2 Enable List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 33 amp Figure 4 9 34 appear Enable Authentication List Mew Authentication List List Name Method 1 Method2 Method 3 Add Figure 4 9 33 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list the available length is 31 characters e Method 1 3 Set the login authentication method Empty None Enable TACACS RADIUS Button Add l TE Click to add authentication list Enable Authentication Lists ETS ETTO CS Figure 4 9 34 Login Authe
40. B o se pam jm B ec pam p CU O CAN sep pam j m b o o ees pam bo bo ANN sea pam fa io ces pam m ANN ens eme p po eer pam fa bo lt p o ses pam m SoSo YO ere pam bo bo AN ee pa bo B SoS yY ce pam j ho o bo o p o o sm mae CAMA CU B s mae bo po o SE wa m B C3 co Co Co c3 C80 Co co f Co C co Co Co C3 co CO co co co co co cO Figure 4 14 3 PoE Port Status Page Screenshot 286 The page includes User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Status Display per PoE port operation status e Class Display per PoE port PD device class information e Priority Display per PoE port priority information e Power Consumption Display per PoE port power consumption information watts e Power Budget watts Display per PoE port power budget information 4 14 3 PoE Delay Setting PoE delay is to delay power feeding when the switch is completely booted up This page allows adjusting per port PoE delay time and viewing per PoE port status The PoE Delay Setting screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears PoE Delay
41. CIST instance settings The CIST Instance Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 6 8 amp Figure 4 6 9 4 Figure 4 6 10 appear CIST Instance Setting CIST Instance Setting Apply Figure 4 6 8 CIST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Priority e Max Hops e Forward Delay e Max Age Description Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 1 to 40 hops The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds 129 e Tx Hold Count e Hello Time Button Apply Click to apply changes CIST Instance Information Information Value Inf
42. Click to apply changes User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Console Information Information Name Information Value Login Authentication List Default SwmTme Sd Figure 4 9 46 Console Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List EXEC Accounting List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Description Display the current login authentication list information Display the current enable authentication list information Display the EXEC accounting list information Display the current session timeout information Displays the current password retry count information Display the current silent time information 233 4 9 8 2 Telnet User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Telnet Settings and Information screen in Figure 4 9 47 amp Figure 4 9 48 appear Telnet Settings Telnet Settings Apply Disconnect 0 0 65535 seconds Figure 4 9 47 Telnet Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Telnet Service e Login Authentication List e Enable Authentication List e EXEC Accounting List e Session Timeout e Password Retry Count e Silent Time Button Appl Apply Click to apply changes Disconnect Description Disable or enable telnet service Select login authentication list for this drop down list Select enable authentication list f
43. DHCP Snooping Setting DHCP Snooping Setting DHCP 3nooping Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 9 14 DHCP Snooping Setting Page Screenshot 207 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP Snooping Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Default mode is Disabled and possible modes are B Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports B Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Button Apply Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping Information DHCP Snooping Disabled Figure 4 9 15 DHCP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP Snooping Display the current DHCP snooping status 4 9 3 3 VLAN Setting Command Usage e When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch and enabled on the specified VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN e When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled e When DHCP snooping is globally enabled and DHCP snooping is then disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table The DH
44. DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of PoE Managed Switch in dotted decimal notation e Subnet Mask Provide the subnet mask of PoE Managed Switch dotted decimal notation e Gateway Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation Button Apply Click to apply changes IF Information Information Name Information Value DHCP State Disabled Static IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 2 3 IP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP State Display the current DHCP state e Static IP Address Display the current IP address e Static Subnet Mask Display the current subnet mask e Static Gateway Display the current gateway 46 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 3 User Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users and privilege type Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup completed please press Apply button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screens in Figure 4 2 4 amp Figure 4 2 5 appear Account Manager New User User Name Password
45. Description e Trust Mode Set the QoS mode the optios are shown as below Cos 802 1p Default DSCP CoS 802 1p DSCP IP Precedence e Default Mode Status Set the default mode as Trusted or Not Trusted Default Button Appl PP Click to apply changes QoS Information Information Name Information Value Default Mode Status Not Trusted Figure 4 8 18 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Display the current QoS mode e Default Mode Status Disaply the current default mode status 177 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 4 2 Class Mapping The QoS Class Mapping and Class Mapping status screen in Figure 4 8 19 amp Figure 4 8 20 appear Class Configuration Class Configuration OP o MAC IF or MAC IPv4 v lor IPw6 Add Figure 4 8 19 QoS Class Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Class Name Input the class name and 32 characters allowed e Match ACL Type Choose IP MAC or IP or MAC as match ACL type e IP Choose IPv4 or IPv6 e MAC Choose specific MAC adrress e Preferred ACL Choose IP or MAC for preferred ACL Button Add Click to add Class Mapping profile entry Class Table Figure 4 8 20 QoS Class Mapping Table Page Screenshot 178 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page inc
46. Figure 4 9 6 EAP Message Exchange i Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the au
47. GS 4210 24P2S 4 5 6 Port VLAN Membership This Page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears Port VLAN Membership Port VLAN Membership Table Figure 4 5 6 Port VLAN Membership Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Mode Display the current VLAN mode e Administrative VLANs Display the current administrative VLANs e Operational VLANs Display the current operational VLANs e Modify Edit Click to modify VLAN membership 108 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 5 7 Protocol VLAN Group Setting The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this POE Managed Switch with protocol based VLANSs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these ste
48. MGB L120 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 120KM MGB LA10 SFP Port 1000Base LX MGB LB10 SFP Port 1000Base LX MGB LA20 SFP Port 1000Base LX MGB LB20 SFP Port 1000Base LX MGB LA40 SFP Port 1000Base LX B MGB LB40 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 10KM WDM TX 1550nm 10KM WDM TX 1310nm 20KM WDM TX 1550nm 20KM WDM TX 1310nm 40KM gt NN DD WDM TX 1550nm 40KM Fast Ethernet SFP Transceiver Modules a MFB FX SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 2KM MFB F20 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 20KM MFB F40 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 40KM MFB F60 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 60KM MFB FA20 SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1310nm 20KM MFB FB20 SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1550nm 20KM It is recommended to use PLANET SFP on the PoE Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported the PoE Managed Switch will not recognize it In the installation steps below this Manual uses Gigabit SFP transceiver as an example However the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar 1 Before we connect PoE Managed Switch to the other network device we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX 2 Check whether the fiber optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement Toconnect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver please use the multi mode fi
49. Managed Switch Console Login Screen For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface 306 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Configure IP address The PoE Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as follows IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the POE Managed Switch please use the procedures as follows 1 2 3 4 Display of the current IP address On GS 4210 24P2S prompt enter show ip The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway shown in Figure 5 2 switch Command Line Interface Press any key to continue Username admin Password 6354210 24P25 show 1 IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Netmask 259 299 299 0 Default Gateway 192 166 8 254 65 4210 24P25 HW _ Figure 5 2 IP Information Screen Configuration of the IP address On GS 4210 24P2S prompt enter configure On GS 4210 24P2S config prompt enter the following command and press Enter as shown in Figure 5 3 GS 4210 24P2S config ip address 192 168 1 100 mask 255 255 255 0 GS 4210 24P2S config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 The previous command would apply the following settings for the PoE Managed Switch IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway
50. Object Description e HTTP Service Disable or enable HTTP service Default is Enabled e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list for this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value Default is 10 and available range is 0 86400 minutes Button Appl Pp Click to apply changes Information Name Information Value HTTP Service Enabled Figure 4 9 50 HTTP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTP Service Display the current HTTP service information e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list information e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout information 236 4 9 8 4 HTTPs User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The HTTPs Settings and Information screen in Figure 4 9 51 amp Figure 4 9 52 appear HTTPS Settings HTTPS Settings Apply Enabled Disabled Login Authentication List Default it 10 0 86400 minutes Figure 4 9 51 HT TPs Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e HTTPs Service e Login Authentication List e Session Timeout Button Appl PP Click to apply changes Description Disable or enable HTTPs service Default is Disabled Select login authentication list for this drop down list Set the session timeout value Default is 10 and available range is 0 86400 minutes HTTPS Information
51. Object Description e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Button Appl Pp Click to apply changes Engine ID Status Lise Default Enabled Engine ID 00304F4FPFFO1 Figure 4 2 34 SNMPv3 Engine ID Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Default Display the current status e Engine ID Display the current engine ID 69 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 6 10 SNMP Remote Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 remote Engine ID on this page The SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 35 amp Figure 4 2 36 appear SNMP Remote Engine ID Remote Engine ID Setting Remote IP Address Engine ID Figure 4 2 35 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote IP Address Indicates the SNMP remote engine ID address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to Buttons Add Click to add a new Engine ID entry Remote Engine ID Status Remote IP Address Remote Engine ID Figure 4 2 36 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote IP
52. PartnerS ysld Figure 4 4 13 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Display the current LAG ID e Port Display the current port number e PartnerSysld The system ID of link partner This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner e PnKey Port key of partner This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner e AtKey Port key of actor The key is designed to be the same as trunk ID e Sel LACP selection logic status of the port B S means selected B U means unselected B D means standby e Mux LACP mux state machine status of the port B DETACH means the port is in detached state B WAIT means waiting state B ATTACH means attach state B CLLCT means collecting state B DSTRBT means distributing state e Receiv LACP receive state machine status of the port B INIT means the port is in initialize state B PORTds means port disabled state E EXPR means expired state B ACPds means LACP disabled state 95 e PrdTx e AtState e PnState User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B DFLT means defaulted state B CRRNT means current state LACP periodic transmission state machine status of the port B no PRD means the port is in no periodic state B FstPRD means fast periodic state B SIwWPRD means slow periodic state B PrdTX means periodic TX state The act
53. Rd Zindlan Olst Hew Talpel Clty 231 Ta wan R O C Te 86 2 2213 5518 FAX896 2 2213 9528 RRO A Zuel 214 PLANE Lezhnaluge Curpurs ur All nghi re se ved Figure 3 4 Web Main Screen of PoE Managed Switch 3 5 SNMP based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the PoE Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Network management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the PoE Managed Switch are public AA A PC Workstation with Managed Switch SNMP application SNMP Agent Status Enabled internet ee IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 x Jes B MT Tr w Ss Figure 3 5 SNMP Management 33 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility For easily listing the PoE Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment the Planet Smart Discovery Utility is an ideal solution The following installation instructions are to gui
54. Reserved for SNMPv3 or User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are B Noauth None authentication and none privacy security levels are assigned to the group E auth Authentication and none privacy 61 e Read View Name e Write View Name e Notify View Name Button Add User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S a priv Authentication and privacy Note The Security Level applies to SNNPv3 only Read view name is the name of the view in which you can only view the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 Write view name is the name of the view in which you enter data and configure the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 Notify view name is the name of the view in which you specify a notify inform or trap Click to add a new access entry Access Group Status Security Model Security Level Read View Name Notify View Name The page includes the following fields Object e Group Name e Security Model e Security Level e Read View Name e Write View Name e Notify View Name e Action Figure 4 2 24 SNMP view Table Status Page Screenshot Description Display the current SNMP access group name Display the current security model Display the current security level Display the current read view name Display the current write view name Display the current notify view name
55. Reset Button Pressed and Released Function Reset the PoE Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The PoE Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as below Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 gt 5 seconds Factory Default 2 1 2 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity PoE status and system power helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 1 2 shows the LED indications of the PoE Managed Switch LED Indication Hebworking amp Communbealion ENE GS 4210 24P25 Ao em PoE In Lise 1000 e LI Jk 100 LI IE CT Figure 2 1 2 GS 4210 24P2S LED Panel M System Color Function Ir Lights to indicate that the Switch has power B 10 100 1000Base T Interfaces LED Color Function 1000 i To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 1000Mbps LNK ACT To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port i To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 10Mbps or 10 100 100Mbps LNK ACT Orange Es ink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights To indicate the port is providing 52V DC in line power Orange ee Off To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powere
56. State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the VLAN ingress bandwidth The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 must a multiple of 16 Button Appl PP Click to apply changes VLAN Ingress Rate Status TT Pot Rate fes Figure 4 8 33 VLAN Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot 187 The page includes the following fields Object VLAN Port Rate Kbps User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Display the VLAN group information The switch port number of the logical port Display the current ingress rate limit 4 8 5 3 Egress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the egress bandwidth preamble The Egress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 34 Figure 4 8 35 amp Figure 4 8 36 appear Egress Bandwidth Control Egress Port Burst Setting 1 659239 unit Bytes EN Bandwidth C ontrol Settings TIIUD Select Ports Disable Enable 0 1000000 musta multiple of 16 Apply The page includes the following fields Figure 4 8 34 Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot Object Button Apply Burst Size Port State Rate Kbps Click to apply changes Description Allow assigning burst size and the options are 1 to 65535 Unit Bytes Select port number for this drop down list Enable or disable the port rate polic
57. Static J Static Y O Static O O Static O Static 2 Static O O Static O O Static D Static Static O Static O J Static Static Y O Static O D Static Static O O Static O 9 Static Static O D Static 2 Static Y Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden O Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden gt Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Figure 4 7 20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot 155 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Select VLAN ID for this drop down list to assign IGMP membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Membership Select IGMP membership for each interface Interface is a member of the IGMP Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the IGMP via MVR Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 4 7 3 IGMP Snooping Statics This page provides IGMP Snooping Statics The IGMP Snooping Statics scre
58. Status Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes SNMP Information Figure 4 2 20 SNMP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNMP Display the current SNMP status User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 6 3 SNMP View Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 View Table Setting screens in Figure 4 2 21 and Figure 4 2 22 appear SNMP View View Table Setting View Name subtree OID Subtree OID Mask View Type Add Figure 4 2 21 SNMPv3 View Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Subtree OID The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk e Subtree OID Mask The bitmask identifies which positions in the specified object identifier are to be regarded as wildcards for the purpose of pattern matching e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are Included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included Excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view
59. Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 5 1 Ingress Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag Untag Table B IEEE 802 10 Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 VLAN 1 20 Backbone Q in Q han Core Switch i m Tunnel MAN Edge Switch 1000Base T UTP SS I lODOBase 5X LX Fiber optic The PoE Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from n
60. Untagged DEZ Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE3 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Y GE4 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GES Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GEB Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GES Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GES Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged t GE10 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged IGE11 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE12 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged DEIN Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE14 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GEIS Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged t GE16 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE17 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE18 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE19 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE20 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE21 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE22 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged pe eG Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE24 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE25 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE26 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAG1 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAG2 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAG3 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged
61. Untagged t LAG4 Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAGS Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAGG Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAG Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAGS Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Apply 106 Figure 4 5 5 Port to VLAN Setting Page Screenshot User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Select VLAN ID for this drop down list to assign VLAN membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Interface VLAN Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode e Membership Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port e PVID Display the current PVID Button Appl PPIY Click to apply changes 107 User s Manual of
62. User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S clear ip arp Description Clear the IP configuration Syntax clear ip arp inspection interfaces LAG lt 1 8 gt statistics clear ip arp inspection interfaces GigabitEthernet lt 1 26 gt statistics Example GS 4210 24P2S clear ip arp inspection interfaces lag 1 statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear ip arp inspection interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear ip dhcp Description Clear the DHCP configuration Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces LAG lt 1 8 gt statistics clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces GigabitEthernet lt 1 26 gt statistics Example GS 4210 24P2S clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces lag 1 statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear ip dhcp snooping interface GigabitEthernet 1 statistics GS 4210 24P2S 315 clear ip igmp Description Clear the IGMP configuration Syntax clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic static clear ip igmp snooping statistics clear ip dhcp snooping vlan x static mac XxX XX XX XX XX XX Example GS 4210 24P2S clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic GS 4210 24P2S clear ip igmp snooping groups static GS 4210 24P2S clear ip igmp snooping statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static mac 00 30 4F 00 00 01 GS 4210 24P2S clear ipv6 Description Clear the ipv6 information Syntax clear ipv
63. User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S IGMP Port Max Groups Information Figure 4 7 23 IGMP Port Max Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Max Groups Display the current Max groups e Action Display the current action 159 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 7 5 Multicast Filter In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service is based on a specific subscription plan The multicast filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port Multicast filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A multicast filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled multicast join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the multicast join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the multicast join report is dropped When you have created a Multicast profile number you can then configure the multicast groups to filter and set the access mode Command Usage e Each profile has only one access mode ei
64. VLAN Group State Figure 4 5 8 Protocol VLAN Group State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Display the current group ID e Frame Type Display the current frame type e Protocol Value Display the current protocol value e Delete Delet Click RS to delete the group ID entry 4 5 8 Protocol VLAN Port Setting This Page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN port for the switch The Protocol VLAN Port Setting State screens in Figure 4 5 9 amp Figure 4 5 10 appear Protocol VLAM Port Setting Protocol VLAN Port Setting Select Ports Group ID Y VLAN 1001 4094 1 Add Figure 4 5 9 Protocol VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot 110 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port e Group Select group ID for this drop down list to protocol VLAN group e VLAN VLAN ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group Button Add Click to add protocol VLAN port entry Protocol VLAN Port State Pot Group LAND Figure 4 5 10 Protocol VLAN Port State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e Group ID Display the current group ID e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID 111 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 5 9 VLAN setting example Separate VLANs 802
65. Warning level of the warning conditions for log view Notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for log view Info Informational level of the informational messages for log view Debug Debug level of the debugging messages for log view The category of the log view that are including AAA ACL CABLE DIAG CDP DAI DHCP SNOOPING Dot1X GVRP IGMP SNOOPING IPSG L2 LLDP Mirror MLD SNOOPING Platform PM Port PORT SECURITY QoS Rate SNMP 56 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Button View Click to view log Logging Information Eno AAA ACL CABLE DIAG COP DAI DHCP SNOOPING Dotis GRP IGMP_SNODPING IPSG L2 LLDP gory Mirror MLDLSNOOPING Platform PM Part PORT SECURITY QoS Rate SNMP Total Entries Figure 4 2 17 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target Display the current log target e Severity Display the current log severity e Categery Display the current log categery e Total Entries Display the current log entries Logging Messages Clear buffered messages Refresh Jan 01 10 17 10 Fort 24 STF port state is set to Forwarding Figure 4 2 18 Logging Messages Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for logs e Timestamp Display the time of log e Category Display the category type e Severity Display the severity type e Mes
66. appear Queue Settings Gueue Table Scheduling Method Strict Priority of WRR Bandwidth The page includes the following fields Object e Queue e dk Figure 4 8 5 Queue Table Page Screenshot Description Display the current queue ID e Strict Priority e WRR Weight Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority on this switch port Controls whether the scheduler mode is Weighted on this switch port Controls the weight for this queue This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted of WRR Bandwidth Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes Display the current bandwith for each queue 167 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Information Name Information Value Figure 4 8 6 Queue Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Information Name Display the current queue method information e Information Value Display the current queue vlaue information 4 8 2 4 CoS Mapping The CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 7 amp Figure 4 8 8 appear CoS Mapping CoS to Queue Mapping ice y 1 2 4 5 7 Queue to CoS Mapping Figure 4 8 7 CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select
67. appear Storm Control Global storm Control Global Setting Apply Figure 4 9 1 Storm Control Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as pps or bps The default value is bps e Preamble amp IFG Set the excluded or included interframe gap Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 192 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Storm Control Global Information Information Name Information Value Preamble IFG Excluded Figure 4 9 2 Storm Control Global Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Display the current unit e Preamble IFG Display the current preamble amp IFG 4 9 1 2 Port Setting Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There are three types of storm rate control E Broadcast storm rate control Unknown Unicast storm rate control E Unknow Multicast storm rate contro The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unknown unicast unknown multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screens in Figure 4 9 3 amp Figure 4 9 4 appear Storm Control Storm Control Setting Action Type Enable Rate unit 16Kbps Select Ports 9 Disable L Unknown Multicast O Enable Apply Figure 4 9 3 Storm Control Setting Page Screenshot The page include
68. ares ii 319 0 2 CODY COImimalbitras tee adusta acc aoe ee A ether SON cartel ou ucro adc el a cerca A S lies 319 6 20 GCDUG Commanna atta aie ae ccc 319 Sn e Cu dd Sate taucodusta neta ca tages heresies ateviners 320 O21 CISA Commande a ida 320 02 S endi COMAN feet re PEN 320 A O a a E E N 321 0 2 A0 IO COMMMANNG or A te RUE CoU S S 321 O2 PINO COMINO Ea ate cada ted lene e a late ici 322 A FE DOOL COMMA eene c c TR 322 02 LIME CON ee E 322 6 2 14 Festore deraults CoFBTBbiG sini besos ovpcpc ld 323 0210 Save COMMANA en EP O 323 A sea Se EN 323 OZ SSICOMMIAING ir ici 324 6 2 1 0 traceroute coImPpDal8 seen cess tutore brique Eoi belts cu pte to pr Dat Eaux PA 324 A GIG COMM ANC ARO 325 6 3 Global Config Mode COIImahds ei ri ao 326 Oa taad COMM ANG aena n iia 326 03 2 DOOE COMMAN G san e RE 326 63 3 Didge Command serenana ibi 326 ACA SIA Command srren a E A 326 oro AAA e LL LLL LL LI TDI 327 Oe OSC OU A T TC T TT IE UI I IET 327 ooa eroe HH 328 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 03 98 00 GONNA RENTEN 328 0 39 enable COMIMANG ree ccc pcc 328 Or OSG COMME MG tas a mp S 328 35 errdisable COMING uso eir ea a eia e eae ae 328 Do d2ZzedECommabldus toos O 329 ojo Ino e cM TR 329 6 9 14 liosthamesGoImileTIO amp ssssee sense astute boit cotidie in Meter ote A AE 329 6 9 15 IMLS MACS Command aa rcd asce
69. be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 7 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes
70. button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled 126 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Button Apply Click to apply changes By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 65 535 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 6 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 1 999 999 Trunk 1 000 000 100 95 90 Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 4 Full Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 6 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk Half Duplex 200 000 Table 4 6 3 Default STP Path Costs 127 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S CIST Port Status om maw p e e es CMC TOO CO Nm NS NN m CIC CO e Ne m on Eme ho Nm IN NS m em Ehe ho Nm NS NS m om TOO Nm IN Ne m joc Eee CO m IN Ne Mm
71. current port e VLAN Display the current VLAN e Circuit ID Display the current circuit ID 218 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 4 Port Security This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of four different as described below The Limit Control module is one of a range of modules that utilizes a lower layer module the Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learned on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wid The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4 9 29 amp Figure 4 9 30 appear Port Security Port Security Settings Apply Figure 4 9 29 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e Security Enable or disable the port security e Max L2 Entry The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC addres
72. current session time e Authentication Method Display the current authentication method e MAC Address Display the current MAC address 205 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 3 DHCP Snooping 4 9 3 1 DHCP Snooping Overview The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port DHCP Snooping Overview VIAN ID IP Address MAC Address 0 i l 1 192 168 0 1 00 30 4F 11 22 33 2 192 168 0 2 00 11 22 55 AA BB J DHCP Client gs DHCP Trust Port MAC 00 30 4F 11 22 33 DHCP Client e 2 DHCP Server MAC i gt 00 11 22 55 AA BB DHCP Client 3 MAC 00 50 77 56 55 44 Command Usage Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on a non secure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces An entry is added or removed dynamically
73. d Qs 8 Transmitted scr sco eee rena MINNS rro rms mano rms MI mani rms coo sco rs MI normes M 14 Transmitte d mM 8 Transmitted im 14 Transmitte d ur 8 Transmitted a 14 Transmitte d mM 8 Transmitted 10 Trans mitte d 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d TUE de a Transmitted Not 1425 Overloading 22 Transmitted 8 Transmitted Not E 1425 SUE 22 Transmitted 8 Transmitted Not 1425 Overloading 22 Transmitted 8 Transmitted Not 2 1425 Overloading 22 Transmitted 38 Transmitted 14 Transmitte d 8 Transmitted Not 1425 Overloading 22 Transmitted 8 Transmitted a 14 Transmitte d mM 8 Transmitted Figure 4 12 24 LLDP Port Overloading Table Page Screenshot 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d 1 0 Transmitte d 1 0 Transmitte d 1 0 Transmitte d 1 0 Transmitte d l 1426 Not 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted Overloading 2 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitte d e e m e e Q e e e m m m m m m m m m ho ho ho ho Eu ES EL crx E o ES M e c Az M ex 1 0 Transmitte d NO f The page includes the following fields Object e Interface Toltal Bytes e Left to Send Bytes e Status e Mandatory TLVs e MED Capabilites e MED Location e MED Network Policy e MED Extended Power via MDI e 802 3 TLVs e Optional TLVs e MED Inventory e 802 1
74. distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 The range is 1 4095 Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004
75. e Hardware Revision Display current hardware revision information e Firmware Revision Display current firmware revision information e Software Revision Display current software revision information e Serial Number Display current serial number information e Manufacturer Name Display current manufacturer name information e Model Name Display current model name information e Asset ID Display current asset ID information The 802 1 VLAN and Protocol Information screens in Figure 4 12 14 appear 802 1 VLAM and Protocol Figure 4 12 14 802 1 VLAN and Protocol Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e PVID Display current PVID information e VLAN Names Display current VLAN Names information The Location Information screens in Figure 4 12 15 appear Location Information Civic ECS ELIM Figure 4 12 15 Location Information Page Screenshot 266 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Civic Display current civic information e Coordinates Display current coordinates information e ECS ELIN Display current ECS ELIN information The Network Policy Table screens in Figure 4 12 16 appear Network Policy Table Application Type VLAN ID VLAN Type DSCP Figure 4 12 16 Network Policy Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Application Type Display current applica
76. from 192 168 0 100 64 bytes from 192 168 0 100 64 bytes from 192 168 0 100 icmp_seq O ttl 64 time 0 0 ms icmp_seq 1 ttl 64 time 0 0 ms icmp_seq 2 ttl 64 time 0 0 ms icmp_seq 3 ttl 64 time 0 0 ms 192 168 0 100 ping statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip min avg max 0 0 0 0 0 0 ms GS 4210 24P2S gt 311 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 1 4 Show Command show arp Description Show the IP ARP translation table Syntax show arp Example GS 4210 24P2S gt show arp HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask ether C8 9C DC EC D6 DD C GS 4210 24P2S gt show history Description List the last several history commands Syntax show history Example GS 4210 24P2S gt show history show info Description Show basic information Syntax show info Example GS 4210 24P2S gt show info 312 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S show ip Description Show the IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Syntax show ip Example GS 4210 24P2S gt show ip IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 GS 4210 24P2S gt show privilege Description Show the local user privilege level Syntax show privilege Example GS 4210 24P2S gt show privilege Current CLI Username admin Current CLI Privilege 15 GS 4210 24P2S gt show version Description Show the system hardware and software stat
77. link state Display the active member Display the standby member Click Edit to modify LAG configuraiton This page allows setting configuration for per LAG The LAG Port setting screens in Figure 4 4 6 amp Figure 4 4 7 appear LAG Port Setting LAG Port Tae LAGSelect Select Enabled Flow Control Select LAGs 2 Frahled Mis abla rl Fnakhler Disabled Apply Figure 4 4 6 LAG Port Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e LAG Select e Enabled e Speed Description Select LAG number for this drop down list Indicates the LAG Port Setting operation Possible state are Enabled Start up the LAG manually Disabled Shutdown the LAG manually Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode Auto Setup Auto negotiation Auto 10M Setup 10M Auto negotiation Auto 100M Setup 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Setup 1000M Auto negotiation 90 Button Apply e Flow Control Click to apply changes User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Auto 10 100M Setup 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Setup 10M Force mode 100M Setup 100M Force mode B 1000M Setup 1000M Force mode When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column ind
78. m SFP Ports m Em pr Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the PoE Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the PoE Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears 39 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Figure 4 1 5 PoE Managed Switch Main Functions Menu Buttons Click to save changes or reset to default LOGOUT Click to logout the PoE Managed Switch REBOOT Click to reboot the PoE Managed Switch d Click to refresh the page 40 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 1 1 Save Button This save button allows save the running startup backup configuration or reset switch in default parameter The screen in Figure 4 1 6 appears SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH Figure 4 1 6 Save Button Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Save Confiurations to Click to save the configuration For more detail infomraiton please refer to the FLASH chapter 4 1 2 e Restore to Defaults Click to reset switch in default parameter For more detail infomraiton please refer to the chapter 4 15 1 4 1 2 Configuration Manager The system file folder contains configuration settings The screen in Figure 4 1 7 appears Configuration Manager Save Configuration 2 Startup configuration Backup
79. multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value The number of organizationally TLVs received 280 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 13 Diagnostics This section provides the system CPU momory usage status and IP layer network diagnostics tool for troubleshoot The diagnostic tool is designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the PoE Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items B System Status B Ping Test 4 13 1 System Status The system status provides and display current system CPU and memory usage status The system status screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears CPU And Memory Information Bru PMienm_usec Mluenm_FreEE Refresh period 5 sec CPU USED FREE 11 0 13 4 26 6 Figure 4 13 1 CPU and Memory Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e CPU Display the current CPU usage status e MEM_USED Display the current memory usage status e MEM FREE Display the current free memory status e Refresh Period Provide 5 and 10 seconds for refresh
80. network name 6 3 15 interface Command Description Select an interface to configure Syntax Interface GigabitEthernet LAG range 329 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 3 16 ip Command Description IP configuration Syntax Ip acl This command creates an ACL which perform classification on layer 3 fields and enters ip access configuration mode address IPv4 Address arp ARP configuration default gateway Set default gateway IP address dhcp DHCP configuration dns Domin Name Server http HTTP server configuration https HTTPS server configuration igmp IGMP Configuration source IP Source Guard Configuration ssh SSH Secure Shell configuration telnet Telnet daemon configuration 6 3 17 ipv6 Command Description IPV6 configuration Syntax ipv6 acl This command creates an ACL which perform classification onlayer 3 fields and enters to ipv6 access configuration mode address Set IPv6 address and prefix autoconfig Enable Ipv6 auto configuration default gateway Set IPv6 gateway dhcp Set IPv6 DHCP Client mid MLD Configuration 330 6 3 18 jumbo frame Command Description Jumbo Frame configuration Syntax jumbo frame lt 64 9216 gt Maximum frame size 6 3 19 12 Command Description L2 information Syntax I2 igmp snooping unknown multicast action drop flood 6 3 20 lacp Command Description LACP Configuration Syntax lacp system priority lt 1
81. of ports must be the same as the group member ports Use the Link Aggregation Menu to display or configure the Trunk function This section has the following items B LAG Setting Configures load balance algorithm configuration settings E LAG Management Configures LAG configuration settings m LAG Port Setting Configures LAG port settings B LACP Setting Configures LACP priority settings B LACP Port Setting Configure LACP configuration settings a LAG Status Display LAG status LACP information 87 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 4 1 LAG Setting This page allows configuring load balance algorithm configuration settings The LAG Setting screens in Figure 4 4 2 amp Figure 4 4 3 appear LAG Setting MAC Address IPIMAC Address Figure 4 4 2 LAG Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Algorithm Select load balance algorithm mode B MAC Address The MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame B IP MAC Address The IP and MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame Button Appl PP Click to apply changes LAG Information Figure 4 4 3 LAG Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Algorithm Display the current load balance algorithn User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 4 2 LAG Managment This page is used to configure the LAG management The LAG Mana
82. or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This POE Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options B Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS B Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS B Local user name and Priviledge Level control 195 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 2 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States H Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below Authentication server RADIUS Server Authentication server TACACS Server Authenticator PLANET 802 14 aware Switch C Interne
83. period 281 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 13 2 Ping Test This page allows you to issue IC MP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Apply ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears Ping Test Ping Test Setting a 192 168 1 100 GX OF hastname Count 4 1 5 Default 4 Interval in sec 1 5 Default 1 size in bytes 8 5120 Default 58 Ping Results E Ap ly Figure 4 13 2 ICMP Ping Test Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Count Number of echo requests to send The range is 1 5 and default is 4 e Interval in sec Send interval for each ICMP packet The range is 1 5 and default is 1 e Size in bytes The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes e Ping Results Display the current ping result 282 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Button Appl PPY Click to transmit ICMP packets Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the PoE Managed Switch or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address 283 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 14 Power over Ethernet Providing up
84. reset button on the front panel for about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted uou can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 10 100 LINK ET Gs 4210 24P2S A 1000 0 LNK Networking amp Communication e PWR v PoE In Use 18 1000 6 LNK ACT 100 LNK ACT Hardware Reset button 300 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 16 2 Reboot Switch The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user has to re login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later The Reboot Switch screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears and clicks to reboot the system Reboot Switch Reboot Figure 4 16 2 Reboot Switch Page Screenshot 4 16 3 Backup Manager This function allows backup of the current image or configuration of the PoE Managed Switch to the local management station The Backup Manager screen in Figure 4 16 3 appears Backup Manager Backup Manager Backup Method Startup configuration Backup Type Backup configuration Flah log Buffer lag 2 Image FW GS 4210 24P238 1 061 40611 Bix Active Fi G 5 421 0 24P25_41 00140611 bix Backup Backup Figure 4 16 3 Backup Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Backup Method Select backup method from this drop down list The optios are TFTP and HTTP e Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Backup Type Select backup type e I
85. router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your PoE Managed Switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the PoE Managed Switch The IGMP Router Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 15 8 Figure 4 7 16 appear IGMP Router Port Setting Add The page includes the following fields Object e VLANID e Type e Static Ports Select e Forbid Port Select Button Add Add Router Port select VLANs Static Fcrbid Ports Select Select Static Ports 4 ru grum mo ox p o t um uu be I m mu A Lins E ii EF XJ mi No Figure 4 7 15 Add Router Port Page Screenshot Description Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router Sets the Router port type The types of Router port as below B Static B Forbid Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Specify which ports un act as router ports Click to add IGMP router port entry Figure 4 7 16 Router Port Status Page Screenshot 152 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN
86. subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and its OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry Button Add Click to add a new view entry View Table Status Figure 4 2 22 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot 60 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e View Name Display the current SNMP view name e Subtree OID Display the current SNMP subtree OID e OID Mask Display the current SNMP OID mask e View Type Display the current SNMP view type e Action Delete Delete the view table entry 4 2 6 4 SNMP Access Group Configure SNMPv3 access group on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access Group Setting screens in Figure 4 2 23 amp Figure 4 2 24 appear SNMP Access Group Access Group Setting m E Security Security Read View Write View Notify View fet vem a r one E Add Figure 4 2 23 SNMPv3 Access Group Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 E v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c E V3
87. table dynamic vlan 1 GS 4210 24P2S clear rmon Description Clear RMON information Syntax clear rmon interfaces lag x statistics clear rmon interfaces GigabitEthernet x statistics Example GS 4210 24P2S clear rmon interfaces lag 1 statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear rmon interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 statistics GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 2 clock command Description Manage the system clock Syntax clock set HH MM SS Month Date Year Example GS 4210 24P2S clock set 13 36 00 jul 3 2014 13 36 00 DFL UTC 8 Jul 03 2014 GS 4210 24P2S 318 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 3 configure command Description Enter Global Config mode Syntax configure Example GS 4210 24P2S configure GS 4210 24P2S config 6 2 4 copy command Description Copy from one file to another Syntax copy backup config flash running config startup config tftp running config startup config tftp Example GS 4210 24P2S copy running config startup config Success GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 5 debug command Description Debug Options Syntax debug acl all common reserve user defined Example GS 4210 24P2S debug acl all GS 4210 24P2S debug acl common GS 4210 24P2S debug acl reserve GS 4210 24P2S debug acl user defined GS 4210 24P2S 319 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 6 delete command Description Delete a file f
88. the current community type e Group Name Display the current SNMP access group s name e View Name Display the current view name e Access Right Display the current access type e Delete Delete Delete the community entry 4 2 6 6 SNMP User Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view The entry index key is User Name The SNMPv3 User Setting screens in Figure 4 2 27 amp Figure 4 2 28 appear SNMP User Table User Setting Privilege Authentication Authentication Encryption fe naauth T Mone T Mone T B 16 chars B 16 chars Add Figure 4 2 27 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Group The SNMP Access Group A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to e Privilege Mode Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are a NoAuth None authentication and none privacy se Auth Authentication and none privacy E Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means you must first ensure that the value is set
89. this function 79 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 3 4 Port Mirroring Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The PoE Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirror Application Port Mirroring Tx 101010 Tx 101010 AOS AA Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 3 8 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring 80 Mirror Port Configuration User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Port Mirror Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 9 amp Figure 4 3 10 appear Mirror Setting Mirror Setting Disabled Y Disable di Select RX Ports Apply Figure 4 3 9 Port Mirroring Set
90. to the DHCP snooping table when a client receives or releases an IP address from a DHCP server Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time VLAN identifier and port identifier When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Filtering rules are implemented as follows If the global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded 206 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S H If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table a lf DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows gt If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped gt If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table gt If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will on
91. work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers B The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header B 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identi
92. you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages below a specified level Event Log Event Tr IP 192 168 0 100 Syslog Server IP 192 168 0 200 Port 514 94 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Remote Syslog screens in Figure 4 2 14 amp Figure 4 2 15 appear Remote Logging Remote Logging Setting Server Address Server Port Severity Facility Apply Figure 4 2 14 Remote Log Target Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Provide the remote syslog IP address of this PoE Managed Switch e Server Port Provide the port number of remote syslog server Options 1 65535 Default Port no 514 e Severity The severity of the local log entry The following severity types are supported WB Emerg Emergency level of the system unsable for local log W Alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log W Crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log B Error Error level of the error conditions for local log Warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log WB Notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log W Info Informational level of the informational messages for local log E Debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log e Facility Local0 7 local user 0
93. 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000Base T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port Trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree protocol Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of Service 19 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 Environment Operatin Temperature 0 50 degrees C i j Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Storage Temperature 10 70 degrees C 3 Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing 20 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the PoE Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the PoE Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the PoE Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the PoE
94. 1Q VLAN Trunk 4 5 9 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLANs The diagram shows how the PoE Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLANs Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 5 11 appears and Table 4 5 2 describes the port configuration of the PoE Managed Switches VLAN Overview PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Untagged Tagged PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged VLAN 3 lt M BB SB SB SB SB SB SS SS SS eS e e VLAN 2 A Sa Se PSE Se Se a SS SSS SSeS SE SSS eee Tim e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e o wo a uw LN Y AAA Figure 4 5 11 Two Separate VLAN Diagrams VLAN Group 1 Table 4 5 2 VLAN and Port Configuration 112 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The scenario described as follows El Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the PoE Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 B Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN T
95. 210 24P2S 4 15 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 NW Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent M History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics E Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records NW Event A list of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 15 1 RMON Statistics This Page provides a Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry RMON Statistics screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears RMON Statistics Port GE1 RMON Statistics Port GE v Clear A CSN CA emerstatsostes OS e emesa 000000000000 gp 0T CE O OSS e emerstatsuteasees O SOS emerstatscRcagnenos O O O O e O emersiteUnderszeres O MM emerstatsov
96. 6 mld snooping groups dynamic static clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics clear ipv6 mld snooping vlan x static mac Xx20 Xx xxxx xx Example GS 4210 24P2S clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic GS 4210 24P2S clear ipv6 mld snooping groups static GS 4210 24P2S clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 static mac 00 30 4F 00 00 01 GS 4210 24P2S 316 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S clear line Description Clear identify a specific line for configuration Syntax clear line ssh telnet Example GS 4210 24P2S clear line ssh GS 4210 24P2S clear line telnet GS 4210 24P2S clear Ildp Description Clear lldp configuration Syntax clear line Ildp statistics Example GS 4210 24P2S clear lldp statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear logging Description Clear log configuration Syntax clear logging buffered flash Example GS 4210 24P2S clear logging buffered GS 4210 24P2S clear logging flash GS 4210 24P2S 317 clear mac Description Clear MAC configuration Syntax clear mac address table dynamic interface lag x clear mac address table dynamic interface GigabitEthernet x clear mac address table dynamic vlan x Example GS 4210 24P2S clear mac address table dynamic interfaces lag 1 GS 4210 24P2S clear mac address table dynamic interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 GS 4210 24P2S clear mac address
97. 7 Button Appl PP Click to apply changes Remote Logging Setting Status Figure 4 2 15 Remote Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Status e Server Info e Severity e Facility e Action User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Display the current remote syslog state Display the current remote syslog server information Display the current remote syslog severity Display the current remote syslog facility Delete 4 2 5 4 Logging Message Delete the remote server entry The switch log view is provided here The Log View screens in Figure 4 2 16 Figure 4 2 17 amp Figure 4 2 18 appear Logging Message Logging Filter Select Target Buffered Y Select Levels Select Categories View Figure 4 2 16 Log Information Select Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Target e Severity e Category Description The target of the log view entry The following target types are supported Buffered Target the buffered of the log view Flash Target the Flash of the log view The severity of the log view entry The following severity types are supported Emerg Emergency level of the system unsable for log view Alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for log view Crit Critical level of the critical conditions for log view Error Error level of the error conditions for log view Warning
98. 82 added by DHCP request packets B Default means the default VLAN MAC format B User Define means the remote id content of option 82 specified by users Button Appl Pp Click to apply changes 215 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Option82 Global Setting Option Remote ID 0 30 4f af f 61 Byte Format Figure 4 9 24 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Option82 Remote ID Display the current option82 remite ID 4 9 3 8 Option82 Port Setting This function is used to set the retransmitting policy of the system for the received DHCP request message which contains option82 The drop mode means that if the message has option82 then the system will drop it without processing keep mode means that the system will keep the original option82 segment in the message and forward it to the server to process replace mode means that the system will replace the option 82 segment in the existing message with its own option 82 and forward the message to the server to process Option82 Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 25 amp Figure 4 9 26 appear Option32 Port Setting Option82 Port Setting Enable Allow UnTrusted Apply Figure 4 9 25 Option82 Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e Enable Enable or disable option82 function on port default mode is D
99. ACE B Any No destination IP address filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the destination IP address filter you can enter a specific destination IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value When User Defined is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the source port for this ACE B Any No specifc source port is specified source port status is don t care B Single f you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE you can enter a specific source port value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value 244 e Destination Port e TCP Flags User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Range If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific source port range value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value Specify the destination port for this ACE Urg Ack Psh Rst Any No specifc destination port is specified destination port status is don t care
100. Address Display the current remote IP address e Remote Engine ID Display the current engine ID e Action Delete Delete the remote IP address entry User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 3 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the PoE Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items E Port Configuration Configures port configuration settings B Port Counters Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics a Bandwidth Utilization Display current bandwidth utilization E Port Mirroring Sets the source and target ports for mirroring a Jumbo Frame Set the jumbo frame on the switch E Port Error Disable Configures port error disable settings Configuration B Port Error Disabled Status Disable port error status 4 3 1 Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations and status Ports can also be configured here The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 1 amp Figure 4 3 2 appear Port Setting Port Settings Port Select Enabled Flow Control Select Ports Enabled O Disabled Enabled Disabled Fiber Ports Enabled Disabled Suto 1000 4 v Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 3 1 Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number for this drop down list e Enabled Indicates the port state operation
101. B Unset TCP frames where the Rst field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care 245 e Type of Service e ICMP e ICMP Code User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S syn Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the Syn field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the Syn field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Fin Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE B Set TCP frames where the Fin field is set must be able to match this entry B Unset TCP frames where the Fin field is set must not be able to match this entry B Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the type pf service for this ACE B Any No specifc type of service is specified destination port status is don t care B DSCP to match If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE you can enter a specific DSCP value A field for entering a DSCP value appears The allowed range is 0 to 63 A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value B IP Recedence to match If you want to filter a specific IP recedence with this ACE you can enter a specific IP recedence value A field for entering an IP recedence value appears The allowed range is 0 to 7 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP recedence value Specify the ICMP for th
102. CMPv6 ping maximum packets size Check minimum size of IPv6 fragments DoS information Source IP equals to destination IP NULL Scan Attacks Ping of Death Attacks omurf Attacks DoS information SYN packets with sport less than 1024 SYN and FIN bits set in the packet SYNC and RST bits set in the packet TCP fragment packet with offset equals to one Source TCP port equals to destination TCP port Check minimum TCP header DoS information Source UDP port equals to destination UDP port Xmascan sequence number is zero and the FIN URG and PSH bits are set 327 6 3 7 dotix Command Description 802 1x configuration Syntax dot1x guest vlan lt 1 4094 gt VLAN ID e g 100 6 3 8 do Command Description To run exec commands in current mode Syntax do SEQUENCE Exec Command 6 3 9 enable Command Description Local Enable Password Syntax enable password privilege secret 6 3 10 end Command Description End current mode and change to enable mode Syntax end 6 3 11 errdisable Command Description Error Disable Syntax errdisable recovery cause interval 328 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 3 12 exit Command Description Exit current mode and down to previous mode Syntax Exit 6 3 13 gvrp Command Description GVRP configuration Syntax gvrp time join leave leaveall 6 3 14 hostname Command Description Set system s network name Syntax hostname WORD this system s
103. CP Snooping VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4 9 16 amp Figure 4 9 17 appear 208 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting VLAN LIST Status Apply Figure 4 9 16 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Status Indicates the DHCP snooping VLAN mode operation Default mode is Disabled and possible modes are B Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports B Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting No VLANs Enabled Figure 4 9 17 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e Status Display the current DHCP snooping status 209 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 3 4 Port Setting Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted Command Usage e A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall e When DHCP snooping enabled both globally and on a VLAN
104. Configuration BPDUs Display the current configuration BPDUs received Received e TCN BPDUs Received Display the current TCN BPDUs received e MSTP BPDUs Display the current MSTP BPDUs received Received 140 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S e Configuration BPDUs Display the configuration BPDUs transmitted Transmitted e TCN BPDUs Display the current TCN BPDUs transmitted Transmitted e MSTP BPDUs Display the current BPDUs transmitted Transmitted 141 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 7 Multicast This section has the following items 3 Properties Configures multicast properties E IGMP Snooping Configures IGMP snooping settings a IGMP Snooping Statistics Display the IGMP snooping statistics Multicast Throttling Configures multicast throttling setting Setting E Multicast Filter Configures multicast filter 4 7 1 Properties This page provides multicast properties related configuration The multicast Properties and Information screen in Figure 4 7 1 amp Figure 4 7 2 appear Properties Properties Setting L2 Unknown Multicast Action Drop Flood IP Unknown Multicast Action Drop Flood Rauter Part IPv4 Forward Method MAC Src Dst Ip Apply Figure 4 7 1 Properties Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e L2 Unknow Multicast Action for L2 unknown multicast traffic Action Options are Drop or flood e IP Unknown Multicast Action for IP unknown mul
105. D is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged B Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default B Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you w
106. DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 271 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Button Appl PP Click to apply changes LLDP MED Network Policy Table Delete Network Policy Number Application VLAN ID VLAN Tag L2 Priority DSCP Value Figure 4 12 19 LLDP MED Network Policy Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Network Policy Display the current network policy number Number e Application Display the current application e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e VLAN Tag Display the current VLAN tag status e L2 Priority Display the current L2 priority e DSCP Value Dusplay the current DSCP value Button Delete Click to delete LLDP MED network policy table entry 2 2 4 12 7 MED Port Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Port LLDP MED Configuration Port Setting Table screens in Figure 4 12 20 amp Figure 4 12 21 appear LLDP Port MED Setting Port LLDP MED Configuration MED Enable MED Optional TLVs MED Network Policy Port Select Select Ports Enable Apply The page includes the following fields Select Optional TLVs Select Optional TLVs ll Figure 4 12 20 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot Object e Po
107. E Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the PoE Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer server workstation or router m Connection to the PoE Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For Note more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A 24 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Step5 Supply power to the PoE Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the PoE Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the PoE Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the PoE Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follow the instructions described below Step1 Place the PoE Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the PoE Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 1 5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the PoE Managed Switch Figure 2 1 5 Attach Brackets to the PoE Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same
108. H Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one
109. ID e Static Ports Display the current static ports e Forbidden Ports Display the current forbidden ports e Modify a Edit Click to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 4 7 2 6 IGMP Router Table This page provides Router Table The Dynamic Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4 7 17 Figure 4 7 18 amp Figure 4 7 19 appear IGMP Router Table Dynamic Router Table VLAN ID Expiry Time Sec Figure 4 7 17 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Display the current dynamic router ports e Expiry Time Sec Display the current expiry time 153 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Static Router Table Figure 4 7 18 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask Forbbiden Router Table Figure 4 7 19 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 154 4 7 2 7 IGMP Forward All User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S This page provides IGMP Forward All The Forward All screen in Figure 4 7 20 appears IGMP Forward All Forward All VLAN ID 1 3 Static Static O Static Static O D Static Static O Static O
110. LINK Laven Discovery Protocol a A A A A A ad 255 AAZ 2 LDF GlOD asen a tiated bake uielee lal eutectic Des unda UU 255 2 12 SED PAP OMS UU soraa ips estet en utu E decasdenc emanates feels bM e ee esce c e ee tu Ai E UU EU UTE 258 A ZA LED Local DEVICE EP 262 4 IZo CLDR Remote DEVICE UN 268 AZ GMI AGT OU ONC pace deis boca eset iiatae cde totae est hep aasdeaegaautaes sasudee mI Di EID LL EE DUE addu 269 AZ MEDIOS MN z oui aide ce borne t bc a a lid 273 4120 LUD RP OVGrlOAGiinG cd oeoniita A dey oe Febi cc beads e sons a bad ne patients ede tuis bod unb re Ede Ep ake 277 ATAF LED Stats o OO A O 278 O A E 281 AS T Seated eat DT ETE EUN 281 nn A T m EU 202 4 14 POwer over Ethernet sucursal 284 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 44 T FOE Global Selina e dl nd o a do ULM e Ud 284 ATAA POE PA o 285 444 5 Pob Delay Seting seu tei ld o dd o dau a ais 287 4 14 4 Power over Ethernet Powered Device ooocccconononoccnnonononronononennnaronononrnnana nono nennen nnn nnne nh nnb n nena teneant nen 289 ANO RMON canada adidas i n 290 ASA RMON StS NCS ets A A iia 290 ATS ZION EI IM a ii a A E 292 AMO NE di ie ooo io dede iia 293 AAS A RVION ALARM A A ios 294 AOS PRI IN PIS CORY sheet ict nc ence lo Gace ede 297 z M ORMON FISO LOO acs I a IR D 299 A AG MINTO ANC Ooi rd 300 4 16 12 Eactory Detalla ll aue ea 300 410 2 REDOOLO E Song eae ace
111. Managed Switch Figure 2 1 1 shows the front panel of the PoE Managed Switch Front Panel FEET cen Figure 2 1 1 GS 4210 24P2S Front Panel B Gigabit TP Interface 802 3af 802 3at PoE Injector 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters lg 100 1000Base X SFP Slots Each of the SFP Small Form factor Pluggable slot supports Dual speed 1000Base SX LX or 100Base FX For 1000Base SX LX SFP transceiver module From 550 meters Multi mode fiber up to 10 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers Single mode fiber For 100Base FX SFP transceiver module From 2 kilometers Multi mode fiber up to 20 40 60 kilometers Single mode fiber B Console Port The console port is a RJ 45 port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information including IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached DB9 to RJ 45 console cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users can run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device 21 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Reset Button At the middle of front panel the reset button is designed for reboot the PoE Managed Switch without turn off and on the power The following is the summary table of Reset button function
112. Object Description e Chassis ID Subtype Display current chassis ID Subtype information e Chassis ID Display the current chassis ID information e System Name Display the current system name e System Display the current system description Description e Supported System Display the current supported system capabilities information Capabilities e Enabled System Display the current enabled system capabilities information Capabilities e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID Subtype information e Port ID Display the current port ID information e Port Description Display the current port description information e Management Display the current management address information Address The MAC PHY Details Information screens in Figure 4 12 10 appear MAC PHY Details Auto MNegotiation Supported Auto Megotiation Enabled a Figure 4 12 10 MAC PHY Details Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Auto Negotiation Supported Display current auto negotiation supported information e Auto Negotiation Enabled Display the current auto negotiation enabled information e Auto Neogitaion Advertised Display the current auto neogitaion advertised capailities Capailities information e Operational MAU Type Display the current operational MAU type information 264 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The 802 3 Details Information screens in Figure 4 12 11 appear 602 3 Max
113. P Snooping Version y v3 IGMP Snooping Report Suppression Apply Figure 4 7 7 IGMP Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IGMP Snooping Status Enable or disable the IGMP snooping The default value is Disabled e IGMP Snooping Version Sets the IGMP Snooping operation version Possible versions are B v2 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 2 B v3 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 3 e IGMP Snooping Report Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast capable routers Suppression When you disable report suppression all IGMP reports are sent as is to multicast capable routers The default is enabled Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes 147 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S IGMP Snooping Information Information Name Information Value IGMP Snooping Version IGMP Snooping V2 Report Suppression Figure 4 7 8 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object IGMP Snooping Status IGMP Snooping Version IGMP Snooping V2 Report Suppression Description Dipaly the current IGMP snooping status Display the current IGMP snooping version Display the current IGMP snooping v2 report suppression IGMP Snooping Table Entry VLAN Snooping No The page includes the following fields IGMP ID Operation Status Learn Router Ports Auto Last Member Query Interval sec
114. Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target The target of the local log entry The following target types are supported Buffered Target the buffer of the local log Flash Target the Flash of the local log e Severity The severuty of the local log entry The following severity types are supported WB Emerg Emergency level of the system unsable for local log Alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log Crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log Error Error level of the error conditions for local log Warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log Notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log Info Informational level of the informational messages for local log Debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log 53 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes Local Logging Setting Status Enabled Buttered Emerg Alert Crit Error Warning Notice Info Figure 4 2 13 Local Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Display the current local log state e Target Display the current local log target e Severity Display the current local log severity e Action Delete Delete the current status 4 2 5 3 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog page allows
115. Possible state are Enabled Start up the port manually Disabled Shut down the port manually e Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode E Auto Setup Auto negotiation 71 e Duplex e Flow Control Button Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Auto 10M Setup 10M Auto negotiation Auto 100M Setup 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Setup 1000M Auto negotiation Auto 10 100M Setup 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Setup 10M Force mode 100M Setup 100M Force mode 1000M Setup 1000M Force mode Select any available link duplex for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode B Auto Setup Auto negotiation B Full Force sets Full Duplex mode E Half Force sets Half Duplex mode When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Possible state are Enabled Enable the flow control function Disabled Disable the flo
116. Queue value for this drop down list e Class of Service Select CoS value for this drop down list Button Apply Click to apply changes 168 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S CoS Mapping Figure 4 8 8 CoS Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e CoS Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to CoS Display the current mapping to CoS 4 8 2 5 DSCP Mapping The DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 9 amp Figure 4 8 10 appear DSCP Mapping DSCP to Queue Mapping Figure 4 8 9 DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot 169 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value for this drop down list e DSCP Select DSCP value for this drop down list Button Apply Click to apply changes 170 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S DSCP Mapping Figure 4 8 10 DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot 171 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to DSCP Display the current mapping to DSCP 4 8 2 6 IP Precedence Mapping The IP Pre
117. Range Flag Set DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type ICMP Code Modity Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current protocol Display the current source IP address Display the current source IP address wildcard mask Display the current destination IP address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask Display the current source port range Display the current destination port range Display the current flag set Display the current DSCP Display the current IP precedence Display the current ICMP Type Display the current ICMP code E dit Click to edit IPv4 Based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete IPv4 Based ACL entry 247 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 10 5 ACL Binding This page allows you to bind the Policy content to the appropriate ACLs The ACL Policy screens in Figure 4 10 9 amp Figure 4 10 10 appears ACL Binding ACL Binding Binding Port ACL Select MAC Based ACL Select Ports IPv4 Based ACL IPvb Based ACL Apply Figure 4 10 9 ACL Binding Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Binding Port Select port for this drop down list e ACL Select Select ACL list for this drop down list Button Apply Click to apply changes ACL Binding Table Port MACACL IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL Modify Figure 4 10 10 ACL Binding Table Page Screenshot The
118. S 6 2 17 ssl command Description Setup SSL host keys Syntax ssl Example GS 4210 24P2S ssl Generating a 1024 bit RSA private key writing new private key to mnt ssh ssl key pem You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank For some fields there will be a default value If you enter the field will be left blank Country Name 2 letter code AU 2 string is too short it needs to be at least 2 bytes long Country Name 2 letter code AU TW State or Province Name full name Some State TW Locality Name eg city Taipei Organization Name eg company Internet Widgits Pty Ltd PLANET Organizational Unit Name eg section GS 4210 24P2S Common Name e g server FQDN or YOUR name Marc Email Address marcl planet com tw GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 18 traceroute command Description Trace route to network hosts Syntax traceroute HOSTNAME The IP address or hostname address to trace Example GS 4210 24P2S gt traceroute 192 168 0 100 324 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 19 udld command Description Configure global UDLD setting Syntax udid reset Example GS 4210 24P2S udld reset GS 4210 24P2S Jan 01 08 16 26 UDLD 5 No ports are disabled by UDLD 325 6 3 Globa
119. ST Instance Status MSTI ID Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge nation Value CAT Py C CT ON Designated age 0 p Root Port SS Root Port e A Figure 4 6 15 MST Instance Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTIID Display the MSTI ID e Regional Root Bridge Display the current designated root bridge e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Root Port Display the current root port e Max Age Display the current max age e Forward Delay Display the current forward delay e Remaining Hops Display the current remaininging hops e Last Topology Change Display the current last topology change 136 4 6 7 MST Port Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are global The MSTI Ports Setting screens in Figure 4 6 16 amp Figure 4 6 17 appear MST Port Setting MST Port Setting MST ID P
120. TLVs 4 12 9 LLDP Statistics User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description The switch port number of the logical port Total number of bytes of LLDP information that is normally sent in a packet Total number of available bytes that can also send LLDP information in a packet Gives the status of the TLVs Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the capabilities packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the location packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the network policies packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the extended power via MDI packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the 802 3 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded If the LLDP MED extended power via MDI packets were sent or if they were overloaded Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs was transmitted or overloaded Displays if the 802 1 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to general statistics for LLDP capable devices attached to the switch and for LLDP protocol messages transmitted or received on all local interfaces The LLDP Global and Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 12 25 amp Figure 4 12 26 appear LLDP Statistics LLDP Global Statistics Clear Refresh Figure 4 12 25 LLDP Global Statistics Page Screenshot 2 8 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e In
121. Type Password Retype Password Apply Figure 4 2 4 Local User Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name The name identifying the user Maximum length 31 characters Maximum number of users 8 e Password Type The password types for the user Options e Clear Text e Encrypted e No Password e Password Enter the user s new password here Range 0 30 characters plain text case sensitive e Retype Password Please enter the user s new password here again to confirm Button Apply Click to apply changes Password Type Privilege Type Modify Figure 4 2 5 Local User Page Screenshot User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name Display the current username e Password Type Display the current password type e Privilege Type Display the current privilege type e Modify Click to modify the local user entry Delete Delete the current user 4 2 4 Time Settings 4 2 4 1 System Time Configure SNTP on this page SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The SNTP Configuration screens in Figure 4 2 6 amp Figure 4 2 7 appear System Time system Time Setting 9 Disable Enable Year 2000 2000 Month Jan v Day Y Hous D Y D v Minutes Y Y Seconds O Y
122. Y None Disable Y Day Sun Y Y Week Y Y Month Jan Y Hours 0 Y Minutes D Y Y Day Sun vx Week Y 1 v Month Jan Y Hours Y Y Minutes D v 0 Y Year 200 Month Jan Date 1 Hours 0 Minutes o Year 2000 vx Month Jan v Date 1 Y Hours O Y Minutes o vj Apply Figure 4 2 6 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot 48 The page includes the following fields Object e Enable SNTP e Manual Time e Time Zone e Daylight Saving Time e Daylight Saving Time Offset e Recurring From e Recurring To e Non recurring From User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Enabled Enable SNTP mode operation When enable SNTP mode operation the agent forward and to transfer SNTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable SNTP mode operation To set time manually e Year Select the starting Year e Month Select the starting month e Day Select the starting day e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Seconds Select the starting seconds Allow select the time zone according to current location of switch This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configu
123. a TACACS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead Button Apply Click to apply changes New TACACS dd BvIP address By name m 85595 Wl Lap Default Y Lap Default 1 30 secs 1 0 65535 Add Figure 4 9 40 New TACACS Server Page Screenshot 227 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Definition Set the server definition e Server IP Address of the TACACS server IP name e Server Port Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 0 65535 Default 49 e Server Key The key shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch e Server Timeout The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the server before it resends the request Range 1 30 seconds e Server Priority Set the server priority Range 0 65535 Button Add Click to add TACACS Server setting TACACS Servers Figure 4 9 41 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address Display the current IP address e Port Display the current port e Key Display the current key e Timeout Display the current timeout e Priority Display the current priority e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentica
124. abed Disabled 128120 0120000 0420000 P fo 00 00 0000 00 ioooroooroo 20000 NorNo Autos No Disabed Disabled cn pc Eno bees nn Ju ne pene 00 pm cnn Srs sn a o epum m m ane ra nn er em en ren sim rw AM NE MARI CNN ICE sel pm m ionem essa cassette me penne von bine asa Sonn NNNM Jeroni enn wem m m ionem ra En er em wmm m mm ans sess ansa t ee e penne wem m m ane ees cassette me pem wem m rmm ans Deest ansa rt e TITEL M AN UIDES aeae verum m rmm nsn sensa sss t e nn vem pm norma nn ere rms Figure 4 6 12 CIST Port Status Page Screenshot 20 o m 133 The page includes the following fields Object Port Indentifier Priority Port 1D External Path Cost Conf Oper Internal Path Cost Conf Oper Designated Root Bridge External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Internal Port Path Cost Edge Port Conf Oper P2P MAC Conf Oper Port Role Port State User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description The switch port number of the logical STP port Display the current indentifier Priority Port 1D Display the current external path cost conf oper Display the current internal path cost oper Display the current designated root bridge Display the current external root cost Display the current regional root bridge Display the current internal root cost Display the current designated bridge Display the current internal port path cost Display the current e
125. ag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 2 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet m Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the PoE Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will received the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 In this example VLAN Group 1 is set as default VLAN but only focuses on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group 2 and 3 Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type 113 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 Port VLAW Status SE p ee VLAN ID 2 Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded v Port to VLAN Settings VIANID 2 F Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged Untagged oer pov 0 resi Ort Tago una ENE GE3 Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded Tagged O Untagged im CI OS CSS NE oes Pyora PO Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged o ess Hyd JO Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O untagged CO VLAN ID 3 Port 4 amp
126. aged Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Console e Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 8 2008 operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near the switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Comparison of Management Methods 30 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a termi
127. amp Communleaior Lisername Password Figure 4 1 2 Login Screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 4310 2423 rki jA mim a e PLANET Pdl d SEUL LIE HIE TIR CET MEET 5y14 Fan Managemer Link Aggregation Welcome to PLANET Spanning Ties 33 41210 24P25 Iuli cast 5 4 Port 10 100 1000T 802 347 PoE 2 Port 100 1000 SFP Managed Switch Security PLANET Technology Corporation crank Lamiral gn 10F No 38 Minquan Rd xindian Dist New Talpel City 2H Ta lwan R O C Tal g85 2 2218 9518 LLbP FaxiEBG 2 2219 2528 Diagnostics T Email eupportarplanet eomte af MAC Address Table Malitenance Zuel 214 PLANE Lezhnaluge Curpurs ur A nho re ex ya Figure 4 1 3 Web Main Screen of PoE Managed Switch 37 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the PoE Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the POE Managed Switch provides It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access PoE Managed Switch The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Apply button You need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memor
128. ant it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port 100 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging B VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame B Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this swit
129. anual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e State Display the current LLDP status e Selected Optional Display the current selected optional TLVs setting TLVs The VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection and LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status screens in Figure 4 12 5 Figure 4 12 6 appear VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection Port Select VLAN Select Select Ports d Select VLANs Apply Figure 4 12 5 VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Select Select VLAN from this drop down list Button Apply Click to apply changes 260 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Figure 4 12 6 LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 3 Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Selected VLAN Display the current selected VLAN 261 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 12 4 LLDP Local Device Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen to display information about the switch such as its MAC address chassis ID management IP address and port information The Local Device Summary and Port Status screens in Figure 4 12 7 amp Figure 4 12 8 appear LLDP Local Device Local Device Summary Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address
130. apid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions B Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements E Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups E Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree E Reconfig
131. arms and events PLANET Smart Discovery Utility 17 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 1 5 Product Specifications GS 4210 24P2S Hardware Specifications Copper Ports 24 x 10 100 1000Base T RJ45 Auto MDI MDI X Ports PoE Injector Port 24 802 3af 802 3at PoE Injector Ports SFP mini GBIC Slots 2 100 1000Base X SFP interfaces supporting 100 1000Mbps dual mode C Switch Fabric S2Gbps non blocking o IEEE 802 3x pause frame for full duplex Flow Control Back pressure for half duplex lt 5 sec System reboot Reset Button gt 5 sec Factory default System Power Green 10 100 1000T RJ45 Interfaces Port 1 to Port 24 1000 LNK ACT Green 10 100 LNK ACT Orange PoE Orange 100 1000Mbps SFP Interfaces Port 25 to Port 26 1000 LNK ACT Green 100 LNK ACT Orange LED Thermal Fan 2 Power Requirements 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 4A max Power Consumption Max 330 watts 1122 BTU Dissipation Dimensions W x D x H 445 x 207 x 45 mm 1U height Weight 2 8 Metal Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PSE PoE Standard IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet Plus PSE Per Port 52V DC 300mA Max 15 4 watts IEEE 802 3af PoE Power Output Per Port 52V DC 600mA Max 30 watts IEEE 802 3at PoE Power Budget 300 watts Number of PDs 7 watts 24 19 Number of PDs 15 4 watts Number of PDs 30 watts Layer 2 Functions TX RX
132. as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation IIT Link Aggregation 4 Port Link Aggregation Up to 4 Gbps Figure 4 4 1 Link Aggregation 86 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 8 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link a
133. assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT VLAN has a VID 1 97 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S This section has the following items E Create VLAN Creates thn VLAN group E Interface Settings Configures mode and PVID on the VLAN port Bl Port to VLAN Configures the VLAN membership E Port VLAN Membership Display the VLAN membership a Protocol VLAN Group Configures the protocol VLAN group Setting B Protocol VLAN Port Configures the protocol VLAN port setting Setting 4 5 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This PoE Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applicat
134. at were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts65to127Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified 295 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts128to255Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts256to511Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts512to1023Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets B Pkts1024to1518Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets e Sample Interval Sample interval 1 2147483647 e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are B Absolute Get the sample directly default B Delta Calculate the difference between samples e Ri
135. ates the user string when send SNMP trap packet Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message 67 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S via this port the port range is 1 65535 e Time Out Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 1 to 300 e Retries Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 1 to 255 Button Add Click to add a new SNMPv3 host entry SNMPv3 Host Status Figure 4 2 32 SNMPv3 Host Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Display the current server address e Notify Type Displays the current notify type e User Name Display the current user name e UDP Port Display the current UDP port e Time Out Display the current time out e Retries Displays the current retry times e Action Delete Delete the SNMPv3 host entry User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 6 9 SNMP Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 Engine ID on this page The entry index key is Engine ID The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host The SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 33 amp Figure 4 2 34 appear Engine ID Setting Engine ID Settings Use Default Enabled Disabled gine ID 00504F4PFF51 10 64 Apply Figure 4 2 33 SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields
136. atus Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry e Action Delet Click hiin to delete static MAC status entry 4 11 3 Dynamic Address Setting By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds The Dynamic Address Setting Status screens in Figure 4 11 5 amp Figure 4 11 6 appear Dynamic Address Setting Dynamic Address Setting Aging Time 300 Range 10 630 Apply Figure 4 11 5 Dynamic Addresses Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 630 seconds Default 300 seconds Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 251 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Dynamic Address Status Figure 4 11 6 Dynamic Address Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time Display the current aging time setting information 4 11 4 Dynamic Learned Dynamic MAC Table Dynamic Learned MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The Dynamic Learned screens in Figure 4 11 7 amp Figure 4 11 8 appear Dynamic Learned Part GET Y V LAM Default Y MAC Address D00 00 00 00 00 00 View Clear Figure 4 11 7 Dynamic Learned Page Sc
137. ber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Toconnect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver please use the single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type 2f A N User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Connect the Fiber Cable Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFP transceiver installed Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the PoE Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails To function with some fiber NICs or Media Converters user has to set the port Link mode to 1000 Force or 100 Force Remove the Transceiver Module Make sure there is no network activity anymore Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position Pull out the module gently through the lever Ji MGB SX LX 1 ot Figure 2 1 8 How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it to a horizontal position Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFP module slot of the PoE Managed Switch 28 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the PoE Managed Switch It descri
138. bes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system lt also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements Workstations running Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 8 2008 MAC OSS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platforms are compatible with TCP IP protocols Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card Serial Port connect Terminal e The above PC with COM Port DB9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter Ethernet Port connection e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors The above Workstation is installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access PoE Managed Switch 29 3 2 Management Access Overview User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The PoE Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods H An administration console m Web browser interface u An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the PoE Man
139. can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new multicast join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group Once you have configured multicast profiles you can assign them to interfaces on the PoE Managed Switch Also you can set the multicast throttling number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time The MAX Group and Information screens in Figure 4 7 22 amp Figure 4 7 23 appear Multicast Port Max Groups Max Groups and Action Setting IP Type Port Select Max Groups Action Apply Figure 4 7 22 Max Groups and Action Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e P Type Select IPv4 for this drop down list e Port Select Select port number for this drop down list e Max Groups Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time Range 0 256 Default 256 e Action Sets the action to take when the maximum number of multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded Default Deny Deny The new multicast group join report is dropped Replace The new multicast group replaces an existing group Button Appl Pp Click to apply changes 158
140. cedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 11 amp Figure 4 8 12 appear IP Precedence Mapping IP Precedence to Queue Mapping Apply Figure 4 8 11 IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value for this drop down list e IP Precedence Select IP Precedence value for this drop down list Button Apply Click to apply changes 172 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S IP Precedence Mapping Figure 4 8 12 IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Ob ject Descriptior e IP Precedence Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to IP Display the current mapping to IP Precedence Precedence 173 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 3 QoS Basic Mode 4 8 3 1 Global Settings The Basic Mode Global Settings and QoS Information screen in Figure 4 8 13 amp Figure 4 8 14 appear Global Settings Basic Mode Global Settings Trust Mode Co05 802 1p DSCF CoS8 802 1p DScP IP Precedence None Figure 4 8 13 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Set the QoS mode the optios are shown as below Cos 802 1p Default DSCP CoS 802 1p DSCP IP Precedence
141. ch lE Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 5 3 Create VLAN Create delete VLAN on this page The screens in Figure 4 5 1 amp Figure 4 5 2 appear Create VLAM VLAN Setting VLAN LIST VLAN Action VLAN Name Prefix Add Delete Figure 4 5 1 VLAN Setting Page Screenshot Apply The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e VLAN Action This column allowed users to add or delete VLAN s e VLAN Name Prefix Indicates the name of this particular VLAN the options are 28 characters Button Apply Click to apply changes 101 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S VLAN Table VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type Modify C e TON KR Figure 4 5 2 VLAN Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID entry e VLAN Name Display the current VLAN ID name e VLAN Type Display the current VLAN ID type e Modify Click E dit to modify VLAN configuraiton 4 5 4 Interface Settings This Page is used for configuring the PoE Managed Switch po
142. ch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 122 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 8 LAN 1 Port cost 200 000 A C Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B E C Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 8 LAN 2 8 LAN3 Figure 4 6 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A
143. configuration Destination File Apply Figure 4 1 7 Save Button Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Running Configuration Refers to the running configuration sequence use in the switch In switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by save Source File Running Configuration to Destination File Startup Configuration so that the running configuration sequence becomes the start 41 e Startup Configuration e Backup Configuration Button Apply 4 1 2 1 Saving Configuration User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S up configuration file which is called configuration save To prevent illicit file upload and easier configuration switch mandates the name of running configuration file to be running config Refers to the configuration sequence used in switch startup Startup configuration file stores in nonvolatile storage corresponding to the so called configuration save If the device supports multi config file name the configuration file to be cfg file the default is startup cfg If the device does not support multi config file mandates the name of startup configuration file to be startup config The backup configuration is empty in FLASH please save the backup configuration first by Maintenance gt Backup Manager Click to save configurat
144. correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocols are Eg None None authentication protocol 64 Button Add Authentication Password Encryption Protocol Encryption Key User Status User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S m MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol E SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For both MD5 and SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 16 Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are E None None privacy protocol a DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 16 Click to add a new user entry UserName Group Privilege Mode Authentication Protocol Encryption Protocol Access Right Action The page includes the following fields Figure 4 2 28 SNMPv3 Users Status Page Screenshot Object User Name Group Privilege Mode Authentication Protocol Encryption Protocol Access Right Action Description Display the current user
145. ct Description e Jumbo Frame Bytes Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 64 bytes to 9216 bytes Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes 82 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Jumbo Frame Config Jumbo Frame Bytes Figure 4 3 12 Jumbo Frame Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Jumbo Display the current maximum frame size 4 3 6 Port Error Disabled Configuration This page provides to set port error disable function The Port Error Disable Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 13 4 Figure 4 3 14 appear Error Disabled Settings Error Disabled Recovery Seconds Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 3 13 Error Disabled Recovery Page Screenshot 83 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Recovery Interval BPDU Guard Self Loop Broadcast Flood Unknown Multicast Flood Unicast Flood Description The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a port error is detected and the port action shuts down the port Default is 300 seconds Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by BPDU guard Enable or disable the po
146. d ACE screen in Figure 4 10 3 amp Figure 4 10 4 appears MAC Based ACE MAC Based ACE o Range 1 2147483547 1 is first processed Permit Deny Any O User Defined Os far matching 1s for no matching Any O User Defined o Os far matching 15 for na matching Rares 4084 include o Ringer Range 5DD DiFFFF Figure 4 10 3 MAC Based ACE Page Screenshot Add 239 The page includes the following fields Object ACL Name Sequence Action DA MAC DA MAC Value DA MAC Mask SA MAC SA MAC Value SA MAC Mask VLAN ID 802 1p 802 1p Value 802 1p Mask Ethertype Range 0x05DD OxFFFF User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Select ACL name for this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE B Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned B Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE B Any No DA MAC filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the DA MAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender
147. d Device PD 22 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B 100 1000Base X SFP Interfaces LED Color Function 1000 i To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 1000Mbps LNK ACT To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 100 Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 100Mbps Orange ee ee LNK ACT Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the PoE Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz 4A Figure 2 1 3 shows the rear panel of this POE Managed Switch Rear Panel Figure 2 1 3 Rear Panel of GS 4210 24P2S Mi AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the PoE Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range of 100 240V AC and 50 60Hz 4A Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe on the rear panel of the PoE Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet and the power will be ready The device is a power required device which means it will not work till it is powered If your networks Power Notice should be active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will prevent you
148. d Hierarchy The Command Line Interface CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes by the nature of the commands Examples of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific switch s commands The CLI Command Modes table captures the command modes the prompts visible in that mode and the exit method from that Exit or Access Previous Access Method Prompt Mode This is the first level of access Perform basic tasks and list GS 4210 24P2S gt Enter exit command system information mode Command Mode User Mode Privileged Mode Global Config Mode From the User Mode enter the To exit to the User Mode enter GS 4210 24P2S enable command exit From the Privileged Mode GS 4210 24P2S To exit to the Privileged Mode enter the configuration Config enter the exit command command Table 6 1 CLI Command Modes The CLI is divided into various modes The commands in one mode are not available until the operator switches to that particular mode The commands available to the operator at any point in time depend upon the mode Entering a question mark at the CLI prompt and displayss a list of the available commands and descriptions of the commands 309 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The CLI provides the following modes User Mode When the operator logs into the CLI the User Mode is the initial mode The User Mode contains a limited set of commands The comma
149. d from the auxiliary port with the auxiliary port sometimes acting as backup power in case of PoE supplied power failure How Power is Transferred Through the Cable A standard CAT5 Ethernet cable has four twisted pairs but only two of these are used for 1OBASE T and 100BASE TX The specification allows two options for using these cables for power shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 The spare pairs are used Figure 1 shows the pair on pins 4 and 5 connected together and forming the positive supply and the 341 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S pair on pins 7 and 8 connected and forming the negative supply In fact a late change to the spec allows either polarity to be used Figure 8 1 Power Supplied over the Spare Pins The data pairs are used Since Ethernet pairs are transformer coupled at each end it is possible to apply DC power to the center tap of the isolation transformer without upsetting the data transfer In this mode of operation the pair on pins 3 and 6 and the pair on pins 1 and 2 can be of either polarity EQUIPMENT PSE Figure 8 2 Power Supplied over the Data Pins 342 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 9 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve your issue If the PoE Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the PoE Managed Switch is set up according to instructions in this manual B The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove dupl
150. de you to running the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 1 Download the PLANET Smart Discovery Utility from PLANET Official Website 2 Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC 3 Run this utility as the following screen appears wy PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help 9 Refresh x Exit ac ade Device Name Pasas select Adapter 192 158 0 188 C8 9C D0C EC D6 DD Control Packet Force Broadcast Figure 3 6 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC choose a different LAN card by using the Select Adapter tool 4 Press Refresh button for the currently connected devices in the discovery list as the screen shows below oy PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help wat aes JP dies id 00 30 4F 8F FF 81 65 4210 24P25 v1 060140611 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 254 Default Location Select Adapter 192 168 0 188 C amp 9C DC EC D6 0D Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Multi Update All N Device GS 4210 24P25 00 30 4F 4 E FE 811 Cet Device Information done Figure 3 7 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 34 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S This utility shows all necessary information from the devices such as MAC Address Device Name firmware version and Device IP Subnet address It can also assign new password IP Subnet address and description for the devices Aft
151. default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 1 to 50 and unit is pps Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes 213 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S DHCP Rate Limit Config Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Figure 4 9 22 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Rate Limit pps Display the current rate limit 214 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 3 7 Option82 Global Setting DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to DHCP servers Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients It is also an effective tool in preventing malicious network attacks from attached clients on DHCP services such as IP Spoofing Client Identifier Spoofing MAC Address Spoofing and Address Exhaustion The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding
152. device number 6 3 28 no Command Description Negate command Syntax no 6 3 29 policy map Command Description This command create policy map and enter policy map configuration mode Use no form to delete the policy map Syntax policy map WORD lt 0 32 gt Enter the policy map name 6 3 30 port security Command Description Port security Configuration Syntax port security 333 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 3 31 qos Command Description Enable Disable QoS on the device and enter the QoS mode advance basic Syntax qos advanced Enable Disable QoS on the device and enter the QoS mode advance basic advanced mode Set the trust mode when the default action is ports trusted in advanced mode aggregate policer Configure a policer that can be applied to multiple classes within the same policy map Use the no form of the command to remove policer basic Set system QoS advance mode map Configure the QoS maps queue Queue configuration trust Configure the global trust mode Use the no form to return untrusted state 6 3 32 radius Command Description RADIUS server information Syntax radius default config host 6 3 33 rate limit Command Description Rate limit configuration of the specified incoming traffic Syntax rate limit egress ingress 6 3 34 rmon Command Description RMON information Syntax rmon alarm event history 334 6 3 35 Snmp Command Description
153. dge port conf oper Display the current P2P MAC conf oper Display the current prot role Display the current port state 134 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 6 6 MST Instance Configuration This page allows the user to configure MST Instance Configuration The MST Instance Setting Information and Status screens in Figure 4 6 13 Figure 4 6 14 amp Figure 4 6 15 appear MST Instance Setting MST Instance Setting MSTI ID 1 15 VLAN List 1 4094 Priority Apply Figure 4 6 13 MST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTIID Allow assign MSTI ID The range for the MSTI ID is 1 15 e VLAN List 1 4094 Allow assign VLAN list for special MSTI ID The range for the VLAN list is 1 4094 e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes MST Instance Setting Information Figure 4 6 14 MSTI Instance Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI Display the current MSTI entry e Status Display the current MSTI status e VLANList Display the current VLAN list e VLAN Count Display the current VLAN count e Priority Display the current MSTI priority 135 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S M
154. e If attached device is 100Base TX port will set to 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10Base T Full Duplex 100Mbps no auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100Base TX Full Duplex 340 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW What is PoE The PoE is an abbreviation of Power over Ethernet the PoE technology means a system to pass electrical power safely along with data on Ethernet UTP cable The IEEE standard for PoE technology requires Category 5 cable or higher for high power POE levels but can operate with category 3 cable for low power levels Power is supplied in common mode over two or more of the differential pairs of wires found in the Ethernet cables and comes from a power supply within a PoE enabled networking device such as an Ethernet switch or can be injected into a cable run with a mid span power supply The original IEEE 802 3af 2003 PoE standard provides up to 15 4 W of DC power minimum 44 V DC and 350mA to each device Only 12 95 W is assured to be available at the powered device as some power is dissipated in the cable The updated IEEE 802 3at 2009 PoE standard also known as PoE or PoE plus provides up to 25 5 W of power The 2009 standard prohibits a powered device from using all four pairs for power The 802 3af 802 3at define two types of source equipment Mid Span and End Span Mid Span Mid Span device is placed between legacy switch a
155. e This page is to accounting update parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 37 amp Figure 4 9 38 appear Accounting Update Accounting Update 2 Disabled Enabled Preamble amp IFG Apply Figure 4 9 37 Accounting Update Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e State Provide Disabled or Enabled this function e Preamble amp IFG Provide input the preamble amp IFG value Button Apply Click to apply changes Accounting Update Information Figure 4 9 38 Accounting Update Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e State Display the current state e Periodic mim Display the current periodic value 226 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 6 TACACS Server This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 39 Figure 4 9 40 amp Figure 4 9 41 appear TACACS Server Settings Use Default Parameters Version 6 Versinn 4 m in 28 ASCI Alphanumeric Characters Used sec Range 1 30 Default 5 Apply Figure 4 9 39 TACACS Server Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Key String The secret key up to 128 characters long shared between the TACACS server and the switch e Timeout for Reply Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 30
156. e we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipm
157. e 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 132 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S CIST Port Status 28 3 0720000 020000 e o Diesoronooo a 29000 Nos No Auto No Disabed Disabled Se an enna M a No No Auto No Disabed Disabled ener CE EE Ses ek Cre No No Auto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 AM A o TL No No Auto No Disabed Disabled UT DN UE No No jAuto No Disabed Disabled D GE2 2814 0720000 07 20000 e 2875 0720000 0 20000 zl zl zl vene rne zl vue e j j j OF OF 07 20000 No No Auto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Auto No Dissbed Disable j m m m m co c te GE10 1287 10 04 20000 0 20000 A A e No No Auto No Disabed Disabled 0 a zl m D m Cc 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 D l 28 16 10720000 0 20000 T oe 20000 No No Auto No Disabed Disabled j D D y l E17 12060117 04200007 107 20000 A AA AE UTE 20000 Nano AID ENO Disabed Disabled D D Of l l MN me Y eee UD eee Disahed Disabled xm i 0 m e m 00 00 00 00 00 00 ee e d onononooon 20000 Ne No Pm Dis
158. e Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Click Delete to delete ACL name entry 242 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 10 4 IPv4 Based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The IPv4 Based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 7 amp Figure 4 10 8 appear IPv4 Based ACE IPv4 Based ACE Range 1 2147483847 1 is first processed Permit O Deny Anyi F o O Select fram list icmp Y Protocol ID to match n Any O User Defined DO f Us for matching 1s for no matching e Ary O User Defined o Os far matching 15 far na matching c Any Osingle 9 Range 0 65535 ORange 65536 Range 0 65535 Any OSingle Range 0 66536 0 Range 0 65535 ORange Range 0 65535 0 55538 Range 0 65535 Urg Set O Unset O Dont Care Ack Set O Unset O Dont Care Fsh Set O Unset O Dont Care Est Set O Unset O Dont Care Syn Set O Unset O Dont Care Fin Set O Unset O Dont Care Any ODSCP to match o Range D 63 OIF Precedence to match p Range U 7j Any O Select from list Echo Re Y O Protocol ID to match D Range 0 255 Any User Defined b Range 0 255 Add Figure 4 10 7 IPv4 Based ACE Page Screenshot 243 The page includes the following fields Object e ACL Name e Sequence e Action e Protocol e Sou
159. e includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Display the current QoS mode 164 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 2 2 QoS Port Settings The QoS Port Settings and Status screen in Figure 4 8 3 8 Figure 4 8 4 appear QoS Port Settings QoS Port Settings Port Cos Value Remark Cos Remark DSCP Remark IP Precedence Select Ports Jo x Disable Enable Disable O Enable Disable O Enable Apply Figure 4 8 3 QoS Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number for this drop down list e CoS Value Select CoS value for this drop down list the available options are O to 7 e Remark CoS Disable or enable remark CoS e Remark DSCP Disable or enable remark DSCP e Remark IP Precedence Disable or enable remark IP Precedence Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes 165 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 05 Port Status Figure 4 8 4 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e CoS Value Display the current CoS value e Remark CoS Display the current remark CoS e Remark DSCP Display the current remark DSCP e Remark IP Precedence Display the current remark IP precedence 166 4 8 2 3 Queue Settings User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Queue Table and Information screens in Figure 4 8 5 Figure 4 8 6
160. e the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 must a multiple of 16 Button Appl PP Click to apply changes Ingress Port Burst Size Configuration Figure 4 8 30 Ingress Port Burst Size Configuration Page Screenshot 185 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Burst Size Display current burst size information Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Figure 4 8 31 Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Ingress Rate Limit Display the current ingress rate limit Kbps 186 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 5 2 Ingress VLAN Settings This page provides to select the VLAN ingress bandwidth preamble The VLAN Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 32 amp Figure 4 8 33 appear VLAN Ingress Rate Limit VLAN Ingress Rate Settings Detault 1 v Disable Enable Rate Kbps 0 1 000000 must a multiple of 1 amp Apply Figure 4 8 32 VLAN Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN Select VLAN number for this drop down list e Port Select port number for this drop down list e
161. e timer which ensures that the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port LLDP MED Fast Start is critical to the timely startup of LLDP and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes LLDP Global Config Figure 4 12 2 LLDP Global Config Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LLDP Enable Display the current LLDP status e LLDP PDU Disable Displays the current LLDP PDU disable action Action e Transmission Interval Display the current transmission interval informaiton e Holdtime Multiplier Display the current holdtime multiplier informaiton e Reinitialization Delay Display the current reinitialization delay informaiton e Transmit Delay Displays the current transmit delay informaiton e LLDP MED Fast Start Display the current LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count informaiton Repeat Count 257 4 12 3 LLDP Port Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Use the LLDP Port Setting to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces including whether messages are transmitted received or both transmitted and received The LLDP Port Configuration and Status screens in Figure 4 12 3 4 Figure 4 12 4 appear LLDP Port Setting LLDP Port Configuration Apply Optional TLVs Selection Port Select Optional TLV Select Select Optional TLVs Apply Figure 4 12 3 LLDP Port Configuratio
162. ement The switch system information is provided here Configure the switch managed IP information on this page Configure new user name amp password on this page Configure SNTP on this page The switch log information is provided here Configure SNMP on this page The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears System Information Information Name System Name System Location System Contact MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Loader Version Loader Date Firmware Version Firmware Date System Object ID System Up Time Information Value Edit G5 4710 24P25 Edit Default Location Edit Default Contact OD 30 AF AE FF 81 250 205 205 0 2011 12 41572 May 22 2014 19 25 43 41 0b6140611 Weed Jun 11 10 13 28 CST 2014 1 3 6 1 4 1 10456 1 1539 e CI gt lx L3 T gt E Lo 0 days 0 hours 1 mins 31 secs Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object System Name System Location System Contact MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Description Display the current system name Display the current system location Display the current system contact The MAC Address of PoE Managed Switch The IP Address of PoE Managed Sw
163. en in Figure 4 7 21 appears IGMP Snooping Statistics IGMP Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Total Rx 1525 Valid RX 1463 Invalid RA 52 Other Ra Leave Ra Report RX General Query Rx Specail Group Query RX Specail Group amp Source Query RA Leave TH Figure 4 7 21 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot 156 The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Clear Refresh Total RX Valid RX Invalid RX Other RX Leave RX Report RX General Query RX Special Group Query RX Special Group amp Source Query RX Leave TX Report TX General Query TX Special Group Query TX Special Group amp Source Query TX User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Display current total RX Display current valid RX Display current invalid RX Display current other RX Display current leave RX Display current report RX Display current general query RX Display current special group query RX Display current special group amp source query RX Display current leave TX Display current report TX Display current general query TX Display current special group query TX Display current special group amp source query TX Click to clear the IGMP Snooping Statistics Click to refresh the IGMP Snooping Statistics 157 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 7 4 Multicast Throttling Setting Multicast throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port
164. enshot 220 The page includes the following fields Object e Port Name Enable State e L2 Entry Num e Action e Trap Frequency Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current per port security status Display the current L2 entry number Display the current aciotn Display the current trap frequency 221 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 5 AAA Authentication authorization and accounting AAA provides a framework for configuring access control on the PoE Managed Switch The three security functions can be summarized as follows e Authentication Identifies users that request access to the network e Authorization Determines if users can access specific services e Accounting Provides reports auditing and billing for services that users have accessed on the network The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS servers in the network The security servers can be defined as sequential groups that are then applied as a method for controlling user access to specified services For example when the switch attempts to authenticate a user a request is sent to the first server in the defined group if there is no response the second server will be tried and so on If at any point a pass or fail is returned the process stops The PoE Managed Switch supports the following AAA features e Accounting for IEEE 802 1X aut
165. ent end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted n municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET 24 Port 10 100 1000T 802 3at PoE 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch User s Manual FOR MODEL GS 4210 24P2S REVISION 1 0 July 2014 Part No EM GS 4210 24P2S_v1 0 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S TABLE OF CONTENTS VEIN FTRODUG HON ciar 12 It PACKAGE CONTEING ii emn 12 1 2 Product DESCRIDUON ii 13 1 3 HOW to Use This Manual cin ar 14 do MR CIIM MI M LM M II E 15 13 Product SPECIIGCAU ONS aee 18 ZANSTIAELA MON act eee a UI IRI DIDI DOE ak I III UI 21 2 Hardware Descriptio sistini DE RP 21 2 11 5wWIICh PONE PAM suse petto ettet eee ETE bo MEE is adi 21 20 2 LED WOIGAUOINS ERR TEE TO TTE NINA 22 21 9 Witch Rear Pariel esce De ie RO e s e es vel ba e dau ad i NA ME DE 23 2 2 Stalino he SWItC I eee N 24 2 2 DesktobD InstallallOl A ee A E ha ene 24 22 A RACK MOUNINO a laa 25 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver erosin ae aiaa ae EE A Ea E aA REE E AE RaT 26 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT ccccccceeceeecnecnseensenseeneenscnseenseaseesecaseuseensenseessoaseeseonsensennenas 29 3 1 REQUIEM CIS dd 29 3 2 Management ACCESS OVER 30 3 2 AMISTOSO 31 SA WED Manage metia di daba 32 3 5 SNMP based Network Management ccececccsss
166. enticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the PoE Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local
167. entity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN The Voice Auto Mode Configuration Network Policy Configuration and LLDP MED Network Policy Table screen in Figure 4 12 18 amp Figure 4 12 19 appears 269 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S LLDP MED Network Policy Setting Voice Auto Mode Configuration Auto Manual Apply Network Policy Configuration Tagged Untagged 007 0 osa Apply Figure 4 12 18 Voice Auto Mode Configuration and Network Policy Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LLDP MED Policy for Set the LLDP MED policy for voice application mode The options are shown as Voice Application below Auto Default Manual e Network Policy Select network policy number for this drop down list Number e Application Type Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different pol
168. er The default value is Disabled Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 must a multiple of 16 188 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Egress Port Burst Size Configuration Burst Size 32 68 Bytes Figure 4 8 35 Egress Port Burst Size Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Display current burst size information Figure 4 8 36 Egress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot 189 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Egress Rate Limit Display the current egress rate limit Kbps 4 8 5 4 Egress Queue Settings The Egress Queue Badwidth Control Settings and Status screens in Figure 4 8 37 amp Figure 4 8 38 amp Figure 4 8 39 appear Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Egress Queue Burst Setting Burst Size 1 65535 unit Byte Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings Apply Figure 4 8 37 Egress Queue BandwidthSettings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Burst Size Allow assigning burst size and the options are 1 to 65535 Unit Bytes e Port Select port number for this drop down list e Queue Select queue numbers for this drop down list options are 1 to 8 e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e CIR
169. er of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1518 octets in length 291 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Buttons Clear l o Click to clear the RMON statistics 4 15 2 RMON Event Configure RMON Event table on this Page The RMON Event screens in Figure 4 15 2 amp Figure 4 15 3 appear RMON Event RMON Event Settings Description 4 0 127 Charactors Ap ply Figure 4 15 2 RMON Event Settings Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Selec
170. er setup is completed press Update Device Update Multi or Update All button to take effect The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown below NW Update Device use current setting on one single device NW Update Multi use current setting on choose multi devices NW Update All use current setting on whole devices in the list The same functions mentioned above also can be found in Option tools bar To click the Control Packet Force Broadcast function it allows you to assign a new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address Press Connect to Device button and the input usrname password in web login screen and the web main screen appears in Figure 3 4 Press Exit button to shut down the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 35 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web based management About Web based Management The PoE Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the PoE Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web based Management supports Internet Explorer 8 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE8 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The use
171. ersieps 0 e O UT TD i DII ORQ CAT SS CA SOOO emersar o e DTI SSS smecPMSIHOSMOPRUS e T CA O UTC 4 NN Figure 4 15 1 RMON Statistics Page Screenshot 290 The Page includes the following fields Object e Port e etherStatsDropEvents e etherStatsOctets e etherStatsPkts e etherStatsBroadcastPkts e etherStatsMulticastPkts e etherStatsCRCAlignErrors e etherStatsUnderSizePkts e etherStatsOverSizePkts e etherStatsFragments e etherStatsJabbers e etherStatsCollisions e etherStatsPkts64Octets e etherStatsPkts65to1270ctets e etherStatsPkts128to255Octets e etherStatsPkts256to5110ctets e etherStatsPkis512to10230ctets e etherStatsPkts1024to15180ctets User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Select port for this drop down list The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets The total numb
172. ese Serer eee ners eer te ater eee 301 4 16 Backup AAG Ol MATER A O 301 cL sees a bgrade Ivianddels sonus A Saker oper tie er Peon ire emer Mr mire are O Ant 302 A 10 90 Conigualion MA ee a ee 303 A VO 20 Enable Pas WO lisas 304 5 COMMAND LINE IN DEREAGE suciedad didnt 306 5S 1 ACCESSING the CLl nee 306 Logon to he Console dba 306 Configure Prades di ii 307 S2 TINEO ds 308 6 Command Line Mode aci ada 309 6 1 User Mod Command T dai 310 o lenab COM Ms m mm 310 WZ A E asec Be ded cto dase onc Bren cnn cia esaes een ae ine Pg een cesmaten stad es eels 311 O PINO COMMING iii 311 A A O 312 SNOW APD is 312 SOW ING LON sai id T HL E PIENE NE 312 SOW UO aia a 312 ino Uo age cess ce T T o X 313 SNOW Di IVC OG ai ATA AS AS DRA ARA A AAA 313 SNOW VE SOM A A AA a 313 671 0 aceroule COMMAND ad 314 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 Privileged Mode Comma daa 314 6 2 1 clear COMIMANC aaa 314 Cla a Deea A A 314 e EN zd e RON RENTRER RI rH a E E 314 A ee Mem EN 315 Clear ID alpes rane are etorepu Rss i MN e LM NI UL ML ete 315 ellos M Jo ag Ol NND ETT 315 clear IDAJ o ERN ERE E 316 Clear IPVO sow P xS 316 clear INV ecg Ss sce as asc eects D ee 317 A 317 A TTC Scr rr o 317 clear Wide tM M LI M MI M M MM m M E eatin 318 clear TM ON eR TCR 318 0 22 COCK COMMA MC C sant a ra 318 6 22 COMIGUIS command
173. ess frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled The 802 1X Guest VLAN setting screens in Figure 4 9 11 amp Figure 4 9 12 appear 202 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Dotix Guest VLAN Guest VLAN Setting Guest VLAN Port Setting Port Select Select Ports Guest VLAN Enabled Disabled Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Guest VLAN ID e Port e Guest VLAN Enabled Button Apply Click to apply changes Figure 4 9 11 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot Description This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4094 Select port for this drop down list A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globa
174. ex mode of the PoE Managed Switch B Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status B Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the PoE Managed Switch If the PoE Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port B Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the PoE Managed Switch 2 Try another port on the PoE Managed Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again B 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting B Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check whether the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power 343 User s Man
175. fier TCI Tag Control Information Destination Source Ethernet Preamble VLAN TAG FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Seda Length E type E Old CRC Original Ethernet New Tagged Packet 99 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VI
176. following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number for this drop down list to set VLAN port setting e Interface VLAN Mode Set the port in hybrid access trunk tunnel mode B Hybrid means the port allows the traffic of multi VLANs to pass with tag or untag mode Access indicates the port belongs to one VLAN only Trunk means the port allows traffic of multiple VLAN Tunnel configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling for a downlink port to another device within the customer network e PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped The range for the PVID is 1 4094 e Accepted Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded Options B All B Tag Only B Untag Only By default the field is set to All 104 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S e Ingress Filtering e f ingress filtering is enabled checkbox is checked frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded e lf ingress filtering is disabled frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine However the port will never transmit frame
177. from network data loss or network downtime In some areas installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your POE Managed Power Notice Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the PoE Managed Switch or the power adapter 23 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 2 2 Installing the Switch This section describes how to install your POE Managed Switch and make connections to the PoE Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your POE Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the PoE Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follow these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the PoE Managed Switch Step2 Place the PoE Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 1 4 ae dl _ a Eee bore rtis c nii t sd 1 ea 5 ini A Nc n e A T ES gal Sst LIT 2 Es A 7 wee m H B ln um ui A al a al ad m a 7 Figure 2 1 4 Place the PoE Managed Switch on the desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the PoE Managed Switch and the surrounding objects zu When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4 and specifications Step4 Connect the Po
178. g FCS octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the numbers of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 78 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 3 3 Bandwidth Utilization The Bandwidth Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the ports Bandwith utilization statistics can be viewed using a line graph The Bandwidth Utilization screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears To view the port utilization click on the Port Management folder and then the Bandwidth Utilization link Port Bandwidth Utilization Mbps B 100Mbps B inubpc Bink Down Refresh period 5 soc IFG Enab Tx GE1 3E2GE3 GE4 GE5 GEE GE GE8 GE3 GE10 GE11 3E12 GEI3 GE14 BE15 GE B GE17 GE18 GE19 GE20 GE21 GE 2 GE23 CE24 GE25 GE26 Uo UW UN Uo Ut US Ut UY De LUM Lm Lm Uo Lm Lm Li Ln Lm Li Lm Lm Lm Lum Lm Lm Lm Rx GET sE4GESGE4GE9GEE GE Get GEJ GETU GETT 361 GET3 GET4 5ET15 GE B GET GET8 GE TH GE ZU GE Z1 GE ZZ GEZ3 Ce 44 GE 75 GEZB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OD 0 0 OH CH 0 0 0 OF 0 0 OD 0 0 Figure 4 3 7 Port Bandwidth Utilization Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Refresh Period This shows the period interval between last and next refresh Options B 2sec B 5sec B 10sec e IFG Allow user to enable or disable
179. g fields Object Description e History Index Select history index from this drop down list 299 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 16 Maintenance Use the Maintenance menu items to display and configure basic configurations of the PoE Managed Switch Under maintenance the following topics are provided to back up upgrade save and restore the configuration This section has the following items B Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Mi Reboot Switch You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally Backup Manager You can back up the switch configuration Mi Upgrade Manager You can upgrade the switch configuration 4 16 1 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 16 1 appears and clicks to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Factory Default Restore Figure 4 16 1 Factory Default Page Screenshot After the Factory button is pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as follows Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the PoE Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware
180. g the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 230 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 3 times before it is considered to be dead e Retries Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request e Server Priority Set the server priority Range 0 65535 e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured Range 0 2000 e Usage Type Set the usage type The following modes are available B Login B 802 1X B All Button Add Click to add Radius server setting Login Authentication Lists Figure 4 9 44 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address Display the current IP address e Auth Port Display the current auth port e Acct P
181. gement screens in Figure 4 4 4 Figure 4 4 5 appear LAG Management LAG Management A J TES t ia B ut Apply Figure 4 4 4 LAG Management Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Select LAG number for this drop down list the available range is 1 to 8 e Name Indicates per LAG name and the available range are 32 characters e Type Indicates the trunk type Static Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them e Ports Select port number for this drop down list to esatablish Link Aggregation The available range is 8 ports LAG Management Information Las Name Type Link State Active Member Standby Memter modi uo eme fe wm omnem E EC e um E mnm E ECCL e wm p own m p SON wm E mnm E ECC e wm omnem ELEC e we E mnm E ECC em wm deren 0 EC de Figure 4 4 5 LAG Management Information Page Screenshot 89 The page includes the following fields Object e LAG e Name e Type e Link State e Active Member e Standby Member e Modify 4 4 3 LAG Port Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description The LAG for the settings contained in the same row Display the current name Display the current type Display the
182. ggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 8 ports to be aggregated at the same time The PoE Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 8 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number
183. gure 4 7 25 IGMP MLD Profile Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Index e IP Type e Group From e Group To e Action e Modify Description Display the current index Display the current IP Type Display the current group from Display the current group to Display the current action Click Edit to edit parameter click Delete to delete the IGMP profile entry 161 4 7 5 2 IGMP Filter Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 26 amp Figure 4 7 27 appear IGMP Snooping Filter Setting Filter Setting Port Select Filter Profile ID Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Port Select e Filter Profile ID Button Appl PP Click to apply changes Figure 4 7 26 Filter Setting Page Screenshot Description Select port number for this drop down list Select filter profile ID for this drop down list Port Filter Status The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Filter Profile ID e Action Figure 4 7 27 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot Description Display the current port Display the current filter profile ID Click Show to display detail profile parameter Click Delete to delete the IGMP filter profile entry 162 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 Quality of Service 4 8 1 Understand QoS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic
184. hardware address field SHA settings B 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the DA MAC address B 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the DA MAC address Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE B Any No SAMAC filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a SA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the SA MAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings B 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SA MAC address B 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SA MAC address Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN The available range is 1 4094 Include or exclude the 802 1p value Set the 802 1p value The available range is 0 7 NW 0 where frame is not equal to the 802 1p value B 1 where frame is equal to the 802 1p value You can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x05DD to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value 240 Button Add User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Click to add MAC Based ACE setting MAC Based ACE Table Name Sequence Action mac Wildcard MAC Wildcard ID 802 1p Ethertype Modify Address Mask Address Mask Figure 4 10 4
185. he allowed range is 1 to 300 e Retries Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 1 to 255 Button Add Click to add a new SNMPv1 2 host entry SNMPV1 2 Host Status Figure 4 2 30 SNMPv1 2 Host Status Page Screenshot 66 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type Community Name UDP Port Time Out Retry Action Description Display the current server address Display the current SNMP version Display the current notify type Display the current community name Display the current UDP port Display the current time out Displays the current retry times Delete Delete the SNMPv1 2 host entry 4 2 6 8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv3 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 31 amp Figure 4 2 32 appear Notification Recipients SNMP v3 SNMPv3 Host Setting TE 162 15 3 1 555351 1 300 1 255 Add Figure 4 2 31 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Server Address Notify Type User Name UDP Port Description Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Set the notify type in traps or informs Indic
186. henticated users that access the network through the PoE Managed Switch e Accounting for users that access management interfaces on the PoE Managed Switch through the console and Telnet e Accounting for commands that users enter at specific CLI privilege levels Authorization of users that access management interfaces on the PoE Managed Switch through the console and Telnet To configure AAA on the PoE Managed Switch you need to follow this general process 1 Configure RADIUS and TACACS server access parameters See Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Ze Define RADIUS and TACACS server groups to support the accounting and authorization of services 3 Define a method name for each service to which you want to apply accounting or authorization and specify the RADIUS or TACACS server groups to use Apply the method names to port or line interfaces This guide assumes that RADIUS and TACACS servers have already been configured to support AAA The configuration of RADIUS and TACACS server software is beyond the scope of this guide refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS or TACACS server software 222 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 5 1 Login List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screen in Figure 4 9 31 Figure 4 9 32 appears Login Authentication List Mew Authentication List List Name Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 Add Figure 4 9 31 New
187. icates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Possible state are Enabled Start up the Flow Control manually Disabled Shutdown the Flow Control manually LAG Port Status Type State asias A ETT rates rats ratas Emm ratas ratas Figure 4 4 7 LAG Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Config Status LAG Description Port Type Enable State Link Status The LAG for the settings contained in the same row Display the current description Display the current port type Display the current enable state Display the link status of per LAG group 91 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S e Speed Display the current speed e Duplex Display the current duplex mode e Flow Control Config Display the current flow control configuration e Flow Control Status Display the current flow control status 4 4 4 LACP Setting This page is used to configure the LACP system priority setting The LACP Setting screens in Figure 4 4 8 amp Figure 4 4 9 appear LACP LACP Setting Figure 4 4 8 LACP Setting Page Screenshot Apply The page includes the following fields Object Descripti
188. icy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar 270 e VLANID e VLAN Tag e L2 Priority e DSCP Value User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANS if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services App Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content
189. ields Object Bridge Identifier Designated Root Bridge External Root Path Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Path Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Remainging Hops Last Topology Change Description Display the bridge identifier information Display the designed root bridge information Display the external root path cost informaiton Display the regional root bridge information Display the internal root path cost information Display the designated bridge information Display the root port information Display the remaining hops information Disaply the last topology change information 131 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 6 5 CIST Port Setting This page allows you to configure per port CIST priority and cost The CIST Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 6 11 amp Figure 4 6 12 appear CIST Port Setting CIST Port Setting Internal Path Cost 0 Auto Apply Port Select Figure 4 6 11 CIST Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number for this drop down list e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e Internal Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost 0 Auto as appropriate by the physical link speed using th
190. ields Object e Select Index e Index Sample Port Bucket Requested e Interval e Owner Button Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Select index for this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index Indicates the index of the history entry The range is 1 65535 Select port from this drop down list Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 65535 default value is 50 Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds Specify an owner for the history The range is 1 31 charactors RMON History Figure 4 15 8 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Index Data Source Bucket Requested e Interval e Owner e Action Description Display the current index Display the current data source Display the current bucket requested Display the current interval Display the current owner Click Delete to delete RMON history entry 298 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 15 6 RMON History Log This Page provides a detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 15 9 appears RMON History Log RMON History Log Table History Index select History Y Figure 4 15 9 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the followin
191. if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge CO The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to swit
192. imum Frame Size Figure 4 12 11 802 3 Details Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 3 Maximum Frame Size Display current 802 3 maximum frame size information The 802 3 Link Aggregation Information screens in Figure 4 12 12 appear 802 3 Link Aggregation Figure 4 12 12 802 3 Link Aggregation Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggregation Capability Display current aggregation capability information e Aggegation Status Display current aggregation status information e Aggregation Port ID Display current aggregation port ID information The MED Details Information screens in Figure 4 12 13 appear I Tn PECES MED LetTall Software Revision BJA Serial Number BJA Model Name B A Asset ID BA Figure 4 12 13 MED Details Information Page Screenshot 265 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Capabilities Supported Display current capabilities supported information e Current Capabilities Display current capabilities information e Device Class Display current device class information e PoE Device Type Display current PoE device type information e PoE Power Source Display current PoE power source information e PoE Power Priority Display current PoE power priority information e PoE Power Value Display current PoE power value information
193. ing Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP Global Settings screens in Figure 4 6 4 amp Figure 4 6 5 appear STP Global Setting Global Setting Enabled BPDU Forward PathCost Method Configuration Name 00 50 4F A4F FF 81 Max 32 charactor Apply Figure 4 6 4 Global Settings Page Screenshot 124 The page includes the following fields Object Button Apply Enable BPDU Forward PathCost Method Force Version Configuration Name Configuration Revision Click to apply changes User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Enable or disable the STP function The default value is Disabled Set the BPDU forward method The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to port
194. ing framing characters The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested betransmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to ahigher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested betransmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent 19 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S GET MIB Counters Clear IF MIB Counter Name dot3Stat s amp lignmentErrars daot3statsF CSErrars dot3Stat s amp ingleCallisianFrames
195. ion In the PoE Managed Switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence of running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by Save Configurations to FLASH function so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file which is called configuration save To save all applied changes and set the current configuration as a startup configuration The startup configuration file will be loaded automatically across a system reboot 1 Click SAVE gt Save Configurations to FLASH to login Configuration Manager Page SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH 42 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 2 Select Source File Running Configuration and Destination File Startup Configuration Configuration Manager Save Configuration Running configuration Startup configuration Backup configuration Apply 3 Press the Apply button to save running configuration to startup configuration 43 4 2 System User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the PoE Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items 4 2 1 System Information System Information IP Configuration User Configuration Time Settings Log Management SNMP Manag
196. ions such as videoconferencing VLANS provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This PoE Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features E Up to 256 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard B Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs w End stations can belong to multiple VLANs E Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices B IEEE 802 10 Standard IEEE 802 10 tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging 98 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to
197. is ACE B Any No specifc ICMP is specified destination port status is don t care B Select from List f you want to filter a specific list with this ACE you can select a specific list value B Protocol ID to match If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE you can enter a specific protocol ID value A field for entering a protocol ID value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE B Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care B User Defined If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value 246 Button Add Pyi Based ACE Table User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Click to add IPv4 Based ACE list imr m meas Source IP Address IP Address EE IP dress Destination The page includes the following fields Wildcard IP Wildcard Port Range Port Range C Mask Address Mask Flag IP ICMP ICMP ie m Figure 4 10 8 IPv4 Based ACE Table Page Screenshot Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Source Port Range Destiantion Port
198. isable e Allow UnTrusted Select modes for this drop down list The following modes are available B Keep Default mode B Drop B Replace Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 216 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Options Port Setting Figure 4 9 26 Option82 Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Enable Display the current status e Allow UnTrusted Display the current untrusted mode 217 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 3 9 Option82 Circuit 1D Setting Set creation method for option82 users can define the parameters of circute id suboption by themselves Option82 Circuit ID Setting screens in Figure 4 9 27 amp Figure 4 9 28 appear Option 2 Port Circuit ID Setting Option82 Port Circuit ID Setting Port VLAN Circuit ID Select Ports 2 Default Lser Define Apply Figure 4 9 27 Option82 Port Circuit 1D Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e VLAN Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Circuit ID Set the option Circuit ID content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets Button Apply Click to apply changes Option82 Port Setting Figure 4 9 28 Option82 Port Circuit 1D Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the
199. ists the event levels of the PoE Managed Switch Level Severity Name Description Wolke Noma out sgritoart coraan meant warning Waring contons eg reum tise neos tr enor m Error conditions e g invalid input default used Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted Alert Immediate action needed 4 2 5 1 Logging Service The PoE Managed Switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 10 amp Figure 4 2 11 appear Logging Service Logging Service Settings Logging Service Enabled O Disabled Apply Figure 4 2 10 Logging Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Enabled Enable logging service operation Disabled Disable logging service operation Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 52 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Logging Information Logging Service Enabled Figure 4 2 11 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Display the current logging service status 4 2 5 2 Local Logging The PoE Managed Switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 12 amp Figure 4 2 13 appear Local Logging Local Logging Setting Select Targets Select Levels ll Apply Figure 4 2 12 Local Log Target Setting
200. itch The subnet mask of PoE Managed Switch 44 e Gateway e Loader Version e Loader Date e Firmware Version e Firmware Date e System Object ID e System Up Time Button Edit Click to edit parameter 4 2 2 IP Configuration User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The gateway of PoE Managed Switch The loader version of POE Managed Switch The loader date of PoE Managed Switch The firmware version of PoE Managed Switch The firmware date of POE Managed Switch The system object ID of the PoE Managed Switch The period of time the device has been operational The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screens in Figure 4 2 2 amp Figure 4 2 3 appear IP Address IP Address Setting IP Address 192 16 0 100 subnet Mask 205 455 755 0 Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Mode Figure 4 2 2 IP Address Setting Page Screenshot Description Indicates the IP address mode operation Possible modes are Static Enable NTP mode operation When enable NTP mode operation the agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain DHCP Enable DHCP client mode operation 45 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If
201. ive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 9 6 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 197 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Authentication Client l Eei 802 1X Switch EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request c I EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge 4 EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept C Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized
202. ize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface 38 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 1 Main Web Page The PoE Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the PoE Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the PoE Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Screen Main Functions Menu SFP Port Link Status Copper Port Link Status EP EN 2 ju 1 143 12 12 0 1 E De y Lr 5a 42310 34P 13 SAM LOGOUT HEERS REFRESH spare Part Manage men Welcome to PLANET GS 4210 24P25 24 Port 10 100 1000T 802 347 PoE 2 Port 100 1000 SFP Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation MAC Address Tabla 19F No 36 Minguan Rd Xindian Dist Mew Talpel City 231 Talwan PLOG Te 1006 2 2219 2518 Fari886 2 2219 0528 Emall 3 up po rid pla met com tw Mainramanzi Copright H 4 FLAMET Techrologs Corporation Allri ie reesried Figure 4 1 4 Web Main Page Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the PoE Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Status page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link warn AU E
203. ized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enable after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a 200 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached e Reauthentication Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be Period reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 30 to 65535 seconds e Quiet Period Sets time to keep silent on supplicant authentication failure e Supplicant Period Sets the interval for the supplicant to re transmit EAP request identify frame e Maximun Request The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame Retries without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes 802 1x Port Status Status pps Periodic Reauthentication Reauthentication Period Quiet Period Supplicant Timeout Max EAP Requests Ew ewo O O o erasa pm Emm o e Em pm
204. l Config Mode Commands 6 3 1 aaa Command Description AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting Syntax aaa accounting commands exec system update aaa authentication enable login 6 3 2 boot Command Description Booting Operations Syntax boot host auto config boot system image0 1 6 3 3 bridge Command Description Global bridge table configuration Syntax bridge multicast reserved address Xx xx Xx Xx xXx xx bridge discard peer 6 3 4 class map Command Description User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Create class map and enter class map configuration mode Use no form in order to delete the class Syntax class map WORD lt 0 32 gt specified the name of the class map 326 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 3 5 clock Command Description Manage the system clock Syntax clock source local sntp clock summer time clock timezone 6 3 6 dos Command Description DoS information Syntax dos daeqsa deny icmp frag pkts deny icmp ping max length icmpv4 ping max check icmpv6 ping max check ipv6 min frag size check ipv6 min frag size length land deny nullscan deny pod deny smurf deny smurf netmask syn sportl1024 deny synfin deny synrst deny tcp frag off min check tcpblat deny tcphdr min check tcphdr min length udpblat deny xma deny Destination MAC equals to source MAC Fragmented ICMP packets DoS information Check ICMPv4 ping maximum packets size Check I
205. l Root Cost 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I i BE I I 1 1 Ps uv 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I i x LI I l I l I I l I I I I L l l I I l I I I I l I l x I I I I l I L I I L l l I Li I l Li l l I 1 Li I l l l 1 1 LI l 1 1 1 LI Li I l I l l 1 1 1 1 1 L I 1 1 Li 1 Li L 1 Li 1 1 Li 1 Li 1 I L 1 1 1 L Li 1 Li 1 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I I L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L I I I Figure 4 6 17 MST Port Status Page Screenshot Description Display the current MSTI ID The switch port number of the logical STP port Display the current indentifier priority port ID Display the current internal path cost configuration operation Display the current regional root bridget Display the current internal root cost 138 Designated Bridge Internal Path Cost Port Role Port State Display the current designated bridge Display the current internal path cost Display the current port role Display the current port state 139 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 6 8 STP Statistics This page displays STP statistics The STP statistics screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears STP Statistics STP Statistics T t Oy Gy ITI m ITI om Be ou a m e a a m oo GEY Figure 4 6 18 STP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e
206. llocation Dislpay current power allocation value in watts e PoE Temperature Display the current PoE chipset temperature of port 1 8 e Port 1 8 e PoE Temperature Display the current PoE chipset temperature of port 9 16 e Port 9 16 e PoE Temperature Display the current PoE chipset temperature of port 17 24 e Port 17 24 4 14 2 PoE Port Setting This page allows adjusting per port PoE budget and viewing per PoE port status The PoE Port Setting screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears PoE Port Setting PoE Port Setting Select Ports Enabled U Disabled 1 0 38 watts Apply Figure 4 14 2 PoE Port Setting Page Screenshot Button Appl PP Click to apply changes 285 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e Status Disable or enable per port PoE function e Priority Select priority oprtions from this drop down list The available options are 3 Low Default 2 High 1 Critiical e Power Budget Allow assign PoE Budget to per port of the PoE Managed Switch The range is 0 36 watts PoE Port Status to oo c ma p fea S Bo LLL sk mae b Jm eb mm j p bo lt B lt o s owe bh jm b o o es wm p CU p lt o sm mae faim B o eg wm p CU B cm mae h bh m B o o em wa j h CU lt
207. lly enable disable Guest VLAN functionality B When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN B When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports 203 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Guest VLAN Status GES Disabled GEY Disabled GE10 Disabled Els Disabled GE12 Disabled GEIS Dis abled GE14 Disabled GE15 Disabled GE16 Disabled Ne Dis abled E18 Disabled GE19 Disabled GE20 Disabled GE21 Disabled GE27 Disabled 5El A E O CC E INO ooo GE iste INO ooo GEM E A GE E INO ooo CN E O GEM O E o INO ooo gei pesled IN GE iste O CN E o INO ooo GEB isle O GEI E A GE E O GEM E O GE E O Figure 4 9 12 Guest VLAN Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Enable State Display the current state e In Guest VLAN Display the current guest VLAN 204 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 2 5 Authenticed Host The Authenticated Host Table screen in Figure 4 9 13 appears Authenticated Hosts Authenticated Host Table Figure 4 9 13 Authenticated Host Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name Display the current user name e Port Display the current port number e Session Time Display the
208. lowing fields Object e Privilege Value e Password Type e Modify Description Display current privilege value information Display current password type information Delete Click to delete password entry 305 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 1 Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal is connected to the device power on the PoE Managed Switch and the terminal will run self testing procedures Then the following message asks to login user name and password The factory default user name and password are shown as follows and the login screen in Figure 5 1 appears Username admin Password admin 1 On Username 8 Password prompt enter admin 2 The user can now enter commands to manage the PoE Managed Switch For a detailed description of the commands please refer to the following chapters switch Command Line Interface Press any key to continue Username admin Password GS 1210 24P25 _ Figure 5 1 PoE
209. ludes the following fields Object Description e Class Name Display the current class name e Match Disaply the current match information e Action Disaply the current action information 4 8 4 3 Aggregate Police The QoS Aggregate Police and Aggregate Police status screen in Figure 4 8 21 4 Figure 4 8 22 appear Aggregate Police Aggregate Police Configuration 128 Bytes Forward Drop Figure 4 8 21 QoS Aggregate Police Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggregate Police Input the aggregate police name and 32 characters allowed Name e Ingress Committed Allow input a number as ingress committed information rate Information Rate CIR e Ingress Committed Allow input a number as ingress committed burst size Burst Size CBS e Exceed Action Choose Forward or Drop when the exceed action situation appears Button Add Click to add aggregate police profile entry 179 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Aggregate Police Table Figure 4 8 22 QoS Aggregate Police Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Police Name Display the current policer name e Ingress CIR Disaply the current Ingress CIR information e Ingress CBS Disaply the current Ingress CBS information e Exceed Action Disaply the current exceed action information
210. ly be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header gt If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped e f a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN e f a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN e f the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table B Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped 4 9 3 2 Global Setting DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of switch when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 14 amp Figure 4 9 15 appear
211. mage Select active or backup image 301 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Button J Backu P l Click to backup image configuration or log 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager This function allows reload the current image or configuration of the PoE Managed Switch to the local management station The Upgrade Manager screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears Upgrade Manager Upgrade Manager Startup configuration Backup Configuration Active Backup Upgrade Figure 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Upgrade Method Select upgrade method from this drop down list The optios are TFTP and HTTP e Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e File Name The name of firmware image or configuration e Upgrade Type Select upgrade type e Image Select active or backup image Button Upgrade Click to upgrade image or configuration 302 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 16 5 Configuation Manager In the PoE Managed Switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence of running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by click SAVE then Save Configurations to FLASH function so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file which is called configuration save This page also provides to save all applied changes a
212. mission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Holdtime multiplied by Transmission Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Transmit Delay seconds Transmit Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start LLDPDUS to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanisim Range 1 10 packets 256 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Default 3 packets The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of th
213. n RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 145 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 or Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN a
214. n and Optional TLVs Selection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port for this drop down list e State Enables LLDP messages transmit and receive modes for LLDP Protocol Data Units Options H Disable Default E Rx ONLY H Tx ONLY Hu TX amp RX e Port Select Select port for this drop down list e Optional TLV Select Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised messages B System Name When checked the System Name is included in LLDP information transmitted Port Description When checked the Port Description is included in LLDP information transmitted System Description When checked the System Description is included in LLDP information transmitted 258 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B System Capability When checked the System Capability is included in LLDP information transmitted B 802 3 MAC PHY When checked the 802 3 MAC PHY is included in LLDP information transmitted B 802 3 Link Aggregation When checked the 802 3 Link Aggregation is included in LLDP information transmitted B 802 3 Maximun Frame Size When checked the 802 3 Maximun Frame Size is included in LLDP information transmitted B 802 1 PVID When checked the 802 1 PVID is included in LLDP information transmitted Button Appl PP Click to apply changes LLDP Port Status Figure 4 12 4 LLDP Port Status Page Screenshot 259 User s M
215. n explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Mon Member Leave Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Delaying Member Ets Idle Member Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 7 6 IGMP State Transitions 146 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service e Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 4 7 2 1 IGMP Setting This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 7 7 Figure 4 7 8 amp Figure 4 7 9 appear IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Status Enable Disable IGM
216. n the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network 143 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Multicast Receiver Multicast d Switch Transmitter A E IPTV r Server Router ullicast Receiver D Figure 4 7 3 Multicast Service B Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter A IPTV Server Switch Multicast Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 7 4 Multicast Flooding 144 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Multicast Receiver SMP Snooping Switch Multicast Transmitter IGMP Snooping Switch IGMP Snooping J A Switch C IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 7 5 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined i
217. n the enterprise data centers and distributions 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the PoE Managed Switch and how to physically install the POE Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the POE Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the PoE Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the PoE Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the PoE Managed Switch Section 8 TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to troubleshoot the PoE Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the PoE Managed Switch 14 1 4 Product Features Physical Port 24 port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit RJ 45 copper 2 100 1000Base X mini GBIC SFP slots RJ 45 console interface for switch basic management and setup Reset button for system factory default and reboot Power over Ethernet Complies with IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet Complies with IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet Up to 24 ports of IEEE 802 3af 802 3at devices powered Supports PoE Power up to 30 8 watts for each PoE port 300 watt P
218. naged objects are defined in specific MIB modules network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public 98 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 6 2 SNMP Setting Configure SNMP setting on this page The SNMP System global setting screens in Figure 4 2 19 amp Figure 4 2 20 appear SNMP Setting SNMP Global Setting State Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 4 2 19 SNMP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e
219. nal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the PoE Managed Switch s console port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management PC Workstation with Terminal emulation software PoE Managed Switch Serial Port Serial Port LEE E 115200 8 n 1 Figure 3 1 Console Management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the PoE Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight RS 232 to RJ 45 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are 31 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B 115200 bps B 8 data bits COMT Properties B No parity Port Settings B 1 stop bit Bits per second aye Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow contral Figure 3 2 Terminal Parameter Settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial
220. name Display the current group Display the current privilege mode Display the current authentication protocol Display the current encryption protocol Display the current access right Delete Delete the user entry User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 6 7 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv1 and 2 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 29 amp Figure 4 2 30 appear Notification Recipients SNMP v1 2 SNMPv1 2 Host Setting SNMP Notify SEM LEE RUN Ese con ao v Y Traps Y public y 162 E 3 1 55535j 1 300 1 255 Figure 4 2 29 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e SNMP Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are B SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 B SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c e Notify Type Set the notify type in traps or informs e Community Name Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet e UDP Port Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 e Time Out Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout T
221. nd prompt shown at this level is Command Prompt GS 4210 24P2S gt Privileged Mode To have access to the full suite of commands the operator must enter the Privileged Mode The Privileged Mode requires password authentication From Privileged Mode the operator can issue any Exec command to enter the Global Configuration mode The command prompt shown at this level is Command Prompt GS 4210 24P2S Global Config Mode This mode permits the operator to make modifications to the running configuration General setup commands are grouped in this mode From the Global Configuration mode the operator can enter the Interface Configuration mode The command prompt at this level is Command Prompt GS 4210 24P2S Config From the Global Config mode the operator may enter the following configuration modes 6 1 User Mode Commands 6 1 1 enable command Description Turn on privileged mode command Syntax enable Example GS 4210 24P2S gt enable Password GS 4210 24P2S 310 6 1 2 exit command Description Exit current mode and down to previous mode Syntax exit Example GS 4210 24P2S exit GS 4210 24P2S gt User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 1 3 ping command Description Send ICMP ECHO REQUEST to network hosts Syntax ping HOSTNAME Host name Example GS 4210 24P2S gt ping 192 168 0 100 PING 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192 168 0 100 64 bytes
222. nd set the current configuration as a startup configuration or backup configuration The startup configuration file will be loaded automatically across a system reboot the configuration manager screen in Figure 4 16 5 appears Configuration Manager Save Configuration 2 Startup configuration Backup configuration Destination File Apply Figure 4 16 5 Configuration Manager Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Source File Provide Running configuration option e Destination File Provide Startup configuration and Backup configuration options Button Apply Click to apply changes 303 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 16 6 Enable Password The page allows configuring system password the enable password screen in Figure 4 16 6 appears Enable Password setup Enable Password ES S Clear Text Apply Figure 4 16 6 Enable Password Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Privilege Value Provide 0 15 option e Password Type Provide Clear Text and Encrypted options e Password Allow input the new password and available range is 30 characters e Retype Password Allow input the new password again for confirm Button Apply Click to apply changes Local Enable Passwords Privelege Value Password Type Modify Figure 4 16 7 Local Enable Password Page Screenshot 304 The Page includes the fol
223. nd the powered device Mid Span is tap the unused wire pairs 4 5 and 7 8 to carry power the other four is for data transmit End Span End Span device is direct connecting with power device End Span could also tap the wire 1 2 and 3 6 PoE System Architecture The specification of PoE typically requires two devices the Powered Source Equipment PSE and the Powered Device PD The PSE is either an End Span or a Mid Span while the PD is a PoE enabled terminal such as IP Phones Wireless LAN etc Power can be delivered over data pairs or spare pairs of standard CAT 5 cabling Powered Source Equipment PSE Power sourcing equipment PSE is a device such as a switch that provides sources power on the Ethernet cable The maximum allowed continuous output power per cable in IEEE 802 3af is 15 40 W A later specification IEEE 802 3at offers 25 50 W When the device is a switch it is commonly called an End span although IEEE 802 3af refers to it as endpoint Otherwise if it s an intermediary device between a non PoE capable switch and a PoE device it s called a Mid span An external PoE injector is a Mid span device Powered device A powered device PD is a device powered by a PSE and thus consumes energy Examples include wireless access points IP Phones and IP cameras Many powered devices have an auxiliary power connector for an optional external power supply Depending on the PD design some none or all power can be supplie
224. ng that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client E Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not rece
225. nnens 115 4 6 Spanning Tree Protocol acusada ici 118 4O PINCO Ne EN ELS 118 BOZO Wl ClOD Alt Se UNOS rte meagan eecseres 124 AOS WIE zeige E TO D D LT 126 AOA ClS Ti instance ocn RR REA 129 60 Clo Ti POM SUING ni 132 46 6 MST instanc Configuratio isie ER 135 AO T MST ROT SEUNG asc ec r a TER 137 A e E E T RN 140 AT WAU AS ii Rm 142 2a T ONO di as Ses ita ed LI NEP OR 142 TF 2S MP Deus IU ID che DUM ae A Sui ecd 143 e Sr 2 M Le SeN ERR TETTE E TRUE ibas 147 24 2 2 GMP QUES CUINA euh ai edv e ee RUE ee a e EM aC Ete o 149 A 1 2 9 EY ESA e acs Uo Dent bs ie en ete ce i I CL LEE E 150 2247 6 5MPSIOUD Te a tia les EL uh So St 151 AT 2 0 IGMP Router Setting revisada I m 152 2 MANC eua 153 Ale GMP Forward A ENTER dl dol a 155 AS IGMP SADO PINO Stall CS opis obese o lote 156 4 7 4 Multicast Throttling Setting oooccoconccncconcnncnoncnnnnononononnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnaninnns 158 AICA allicere E 160 2 7 9 1 Multicast Profile Sell iie eren er Aces eee et Ce aed cU a toe te ee 160 AZ EME MES o es cuins ccu e dd lod as 162 4 8 Quality Of SQIViCe a tds 163 Ae S NM MMI SANG SENT TTE E Tc 163 4O 2 CI I Em 164 4 0 21 OS POE ES e did eda aC dd 164 Ae 22 QOS POM SCUING T 165 User
226. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 67 4 2 99 SNMP EndlbelD shh aia a e dd Do dL 69 22 00 9 N MP Remote Engine Din lila pai 70 ASS POr Manhade Menton dea 71 AO FOTO Igura lOs el eL hhh a 71 ao 2 A A O 74 43 0 Bana WIN UZAO N T c r m 79 A DIN FU cp C PEOR URN RS SS 80 A UTI OU AMO ENTE Tm 82 4 3 6 Port Error Disabled Configuration oooncccccoccncccocnnconocnnononcnnonnnnnnnnnrnnonnnrnnonnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnrnnnrnnrnnarinnnas 83 A731 ON Enor Disabled tas A AAA 85 AA TINA GGL zie ii e n MERE A aa 86 NC a en oe me ae ee ee ee 88 4142 LAS Managment as 89 ASLAG PONT Se NN asa aa Santis tic aid iii AN 90 au NDS a a a E enn eee 92 445 T A ec eh ed ae LED E D 93 ES eI ee etat siete eL cti esp i eL 94 SPAN m 97 AAA Pw 97 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 45 2 IEEE SOZ2 MO VLAN cual o a id daa a o e tao a dl ada o ed e al aes 98 45 3 Create VEAN A as 101 AS e NES NEN T a a Na E 102 qo POON EAN o aa Re so A X T CATT oR ILC I mn IE 106 Ao O POR VEAN MED da lhl Rt re oe tee MM E 108 45 1 Protocol VEAN Group SSMN sia ce esrb Ee obi ia 109 4 5 9 Protecol VEAN POR SGING enero oi a a e 110 4 5 9 VLAN setting exa DIS A enumeaeadumusniees 112 AO TWO Separate O02 TQ MANS O O ed e a ee as ace 112 4 5 9 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch ooocccconccnccoccnconoconononcnnononnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnarinen
227. ntication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify i Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 224 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 5 3 Accounting List This page is to accounting list parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 35 Figure 4 9 36 appear Exec Accounting List New Accounting List List Name Record Type Method 1 Method 2 Add Figure 4 9 35 New Accounting List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the accounting list the available length is 31 characters e Record Type Provide following record type Start Stop Default mode Stop Only e Method 1 2 Set the login accounting method TACACS RADIUS Button Add m Click to add accounting list Exec Accounting Lists EC CON CO Figure 4 9 36 Accounting List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Record Type Display the current record type e Method List Display the current method list 225 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S ene Edit Click to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 4 9 5 4 Accounting Updat
228. o eum m cm jew ives e we aea a o a a a Figure 4 12 21 LLDP MED Port Setting Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e LLDP MED Status Display the current LLDP MED status e Active Display the current active status e Application Display the current application e Location Display the current location e Inventory Display the current inventory 2 4 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The MED Location Configuration and LLDP MED Port Location Table screens in Figure 4 12 22 amp Figure 4 12 23 appear MED Location Configuration Location Coordinate Location Civic Address 16 pairs of hexadecimal characters 6 160 pairs of hexadecimal characters Location ECS ELIN Apply The page includes the following fields 10 25 pairs of hexadecimal characters Figure 4 12 22 MED Location Configuration Page Screenshot Object Button Apply Ports Location Coordinate Location Civic Address Location ESC ELIN Click to apply changes Description Select port for this drop down list A string identifying the Location Coordinate that this entry should belong to A string identifying the Location Civic Address that this entry should belong to A string identifying the Location ESC ELIN that this entry should belong to 275 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S LLDP MED Po
229. oE budget Auto detects powered device PD Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports Remote power feeding up to 100m PoE Management Total PoE power budget control Per port PoE function enable disable POE Port Power feeding priority Per PoE port power limitation PoE delay PD classification detection Layer 2 Features User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Prevents packet loss with back pressure half duplex and IEEE 802 3x pause frame flow control full duplex High performance Store and Forward architecture runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth Supports VLAN IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Protocol VLAN Supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol STP BPDU Guard BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding Supports Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Maximum 8 LACP groups up to 16 ports per LACP group Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 8 trunk groups up to 8 ports per trunk group 15 Provides port mirror many to 1 Quality of Service Ingress Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control Storm Control support Broadcast Unknown Unicast Unknown Multicast B Traffic classification Multicast Security IEEE 802 1
230. of the following five states B Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled 119 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S E From disabled to blocking Listening 3 Disable Learning Forwarding Figure 4 6 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the po
231. on e System Priority A value which is used to identify the active LACP The PoE Managed Switch with the lowest value has the highest priority and is selected as the active LACP peer of the trunk group The available options are 1 to 65535 Button Appl PP Click to apply changes LACP Information Figure 4 4 9 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority Display the current system priority User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 4 5 LACP Port Setting This page is used to configure the LACP port setting The LACP Port Setting screen in Figure 4 4 10 amp Figure 4 4 11 appears LACP Port Setting LACP Port Settings Select Ports 1 65535 Long Short Apply Figure 4 4 10 LACP Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number for this drop down list to set LACP port setting e Priority The Prio controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority e Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Short will transmit LACP packets each second while Long will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet Button Appl RRS Click to apply changes
232. on on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode A count of frames received on particular interfaces that exceed the maximum permitted frame size The number of received and transmitted symbol errors The number of received control unknown opcodes The number of received pause frames The number of transmitted pause frames 76 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S GET MIB Counters Clear IF MIB Counter Name etherstatsDropEwents etherStats Octets etherstatsBroadcastPkts etherstats Multic astP kts etherStatsCRCAlignErroars Btherotats UndersizePkts etherstats Oversize Pkts etherStats Fragments etherstatsJabbers etherStats Collisions etherStats F kts 64 Octets etherstatsPkts6Sto127Octets etherstatsPkts125to2550ctets etherstatsPkts 256t0511 Octets etherStatsP kts51 2ta10230ctets etherstatsPkts1024t015180ctets MIB Counter Value Figure 4 3 6 RMON Counters Page Screenshot Object e etherStatsDropEvents e etherStatsOctets e etherStatsPkts e etherStatsBroadcastPkts e etherStatsMulticastPkts e etherStatsCRCAlignErrors e etherStatsUnderSizePkts e etherStatsOverSizePkts e etherStatsFragments e etherStatsJabbers Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources The total number of octets received and transmitted on the interface including framing characters
233. onfigure global UDLD setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Syntax udid aggressive Enable UDLD protocol in aggressive mode on fiber ports except wher e locally configured enable Enable UDLD protocol on fiber ports except where locally configured message Set UDLD message parameters 336 6 3 42 username Command Description Local User Configuration Syntax username USERNAME Local user name nopassword No password for this user password Use clear text password privilege Local user privilege level secret Use encrypted password 6 3 43 vlan Command Description VLAN Configuration Syntax vlan VLAN LIST VLAN List e g 3 6 8 The range of VLAN ID is 1 to 4094 protocol vlan 802 1v protocol VLAN configuration 6 3 44 voice vlan Command Description Voice VLAN Configuration Syntax voice vlan lt 1 4094 gt Specifies the Voice VLAN Identifier 337 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 7 SWITCH OPERATION 7 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 7 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will
234. or state field of LACP PDU description The field from left to right describes LACP Activity LACP_ Timeout 5 11 Aggregation 5 11 5 11 Synchronization Collecting Distributing Defaulted and Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web shows _ if the contents are true the web shows A T G S C D F and E for each content respectively The partner state field of LACP PDU description The field from left to right describes LACP Activity LACP_ Timeout 5 11 Aggregation 7 11 7 11 Synchronization Collecting Distributing Defaulted and Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web shows _ if the contents are true the web shows A T G S C D F and E for each content respectively 96 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 5 VLAN 4 5 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet altho
235. or this drop down list Select EXEC accounting list for this drop down list Set the session timeout value Default is 10 and available range is 0 65535 minutes Set the password retry count value Default is 3 and available range is 0 120 Set the silent time value Default is O and available range is 0 65535 seconds Click to disconnect telnet communication 234 Telnet Information User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Figure 4 9 48 Telnet Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Telnet Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List EXEC Accounting List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Current Telent Session Count Description Display the current telent service information Display the current login authentication list information Display the current enable authentication list information Display the EXEC accounting list information Display the current session timeout information Displays the current password retry count information Display the current silent time information Display the current telnet session count information 235 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 8 3 HTTP The HTTP Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 49 amp Figure 4 9 50 appear HTTP Settings HTTP Settings Apply Figure 4 9 49 HTTP Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields
236. ormation Name Priority Max Hops Forward Delay Max Age Tx Hold Count Hello Time User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second The time that controls the switch to send out the BPDU packet to check STP current status Enter a value between 1 through 10 Figure 4 6 9 CIST Instance Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Priority e Max Hop e Forward Delay e Max Age e Tx Hold Count e Hello Time Description Display the current CIST priority Display the current Max hops Display the current forward delay Display the current Max age Display the current Tx hold count Display the current hello time 130 CIST Instance Status Information Name Bridge Identifier Designated Root Bridge External Root Path Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Path Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Remainging Hops Last Topology Change User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Information Value 32768 0 00 30 4F AF FF 81 O 0 0 0 00 OD ODDO 00 D O 00 00 00 00 00 00 0r 000 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 4 6 10 CIST Instance Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following f
237. ort Display the current acct port e Key Display the current key e Timeout Display the current timeout e Retries Display the current retries times e Priority Display the current priority e Dead Time Display the current dead time e Usage Type Display the current usage type e Modufy Click E dit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 231 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 8 Access This section is to control the access of the PoE Managed Switch including the different access methods Console Telnet HTTP and HTTPs 4 9 8 1 Console The Console Settings and Information screen in Figure 4 9 45 amp Figure 4 9 46 appear Console Settings Console Settings Apply Figure 4 9 45 Console Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list for this drop down list e Enable Authentication List Select enable authentication list for this drop down list e EXEC Accounting List Select EXEC accounting list for this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value Default is 10 and available range is 0 65535 minutes e Password Retry Count Set the password retry count value Default is 3 and available range is 0 120 e Silent Time Set the silent time value Default is O and available range is 0 65535 seconds 232 Button Apply
238. ort Select iii Ani ad i sears aa Apply The page includes the following fields Figure 4 6 16 MST Port Configuration Page Screenshot Object Button Apply MST ID Port Select Priority Internal Path Cost 0 Auto Click to apply changes Description Enter the special MST ID to configure path cost amp priority Select port number for this drop down list Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 137 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S MST Port Status r3 ca ED 1 1 1 1 ho oo d Pi FR oc um I I tw I I a I I 1 LS LN m CS e ipe UN os MA HT 1 MR A I I E I 1 The page includes the following fields Object e MSTIID e Port e Indentifier Priority Port 1D e Internal Path Cost Conf Oper e Regional Root Bridge e Interna
239. ovides an overview of RMON Event Log The RMON Event Log Table screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears RMON Event Log RMON Event Log Table Event Index Select Event T Figure 4 15 4 RMON Event Log Table Page Screenshot 293 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list e Index Indicates the index of the log entry e Alarm Index Indicates the alarm index of the log entry e Action Indicates the action of the log entry e Log Time Indicates Event log time e Description Indicates the Event description 4 15 4 RMON Alarm Configure RMON Alarm setting on this Page The RMON Alarm screens in Figure 4 15 5 amp Figure 4 15 6 appear RMON Alarm RMON Alarm Settings Create N gw 1 21 47483047 absolute delta eT D None Unassigned Y D Mone Unassigned Apply Figure 4 15 5 RMON Alarm Setting Page Screenshot 294 The Page includes the following fields Object e Select Index e Index e Sample Port e Sample Variable User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Select index for this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index Indicates the index of the alarm entry The range is 1 65535 Select port from this drop down list Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are B DropEvents The total number of events in which packets
240. p CoS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Supports IGMP Snooping v2 and v3 IGMP Querier mode support IGMP Snooping port filtering Up to 256 multicast groups Authentication EEE 802 1X port based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers DHCP Option 82 RADIUS TACACS login user access authentication Access Control List Pv4 IP based ACL Pv4 IP based ACE MAC based ACL MAC based ACE MAC Security Static MAC MAC Filtering Port Security for Source MAC address entries filtering DHCP Snooping to filter distrusted DHCP messages Management B Switch Management Interface Local Command Line Interface Web switch management Telnet Command Line Interface SNMP v1 v2c and v3 HTTPs secure access M Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client M Static and DHCP for IP address assignment Mi System Maintenance Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP 16 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Configuration upload download through HTTP TFTP Hardware reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default SNTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol and LLDP MED SNMP trap for interface Link Up and Link Down notification Event message logging to remote Syslog server Four RMON groups history statistics al
241. page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e MAC ACL Display the current MAC ACL e IPv4 ACL Display the current IPv4 ACL e IPv6 ACL Display the current IPv6 ACL e Modify Click Edit to edit ACL binding table parameter Click Delete to delete ACL binding entry 248 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 11 MAC Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The PoE Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frames with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 11 1 Static MAC Setting The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 1 amp Figure 4 11 2 appear Static MAC S
242. port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 3 4 Web Management The PoE Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the PoE Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the PoE Managed Switch you can access the PoE Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the PoE Managed Switch PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 3 Web Management 32 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the PoE Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the PoE Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 0 or later Google Chrome Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later prp 4310 2423 Ane MEME SEUL LIEN HIE TIR ET Welcome to PLANET GS 4210 24P2S 4 Port 10100100071 802 347 PoE Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch PLANET Technalegy corporation Accane Campiel ler 19F No0 38 Minquan
243. port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path Default Spanning Tree Configuration O Auto Feature Default Value Enable state STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge Priority 32 68 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority 121 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used
244. prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by
245. ps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page This Page allows for configures protocol based VLAN Group Setting The portocol based VLAN screens in Figure 4 5 7 amp Figure 4 5 8 appear Protocol VLAN Group Setting Add Protocol VLAN Group Frame Type Ethernet l Y Add Figure 4 5 7 Add Protocol VLAN Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values B Ethernet Il B IEEE802 3 LLC Other B RFC_1042 Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will 109 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Protocol Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected 0x0600 0xFFFE from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Valid values for frame type ranges from 0x0600 Oxfffe Button Appl PPY Click to apply changes Protocol
246. ption Select port number for this drop down list Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUS including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUS it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration
247. r 2 Features The GS 4210 24P2S can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic port link aggregation 802 1Q VLAN Spanning Tree protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP IGMP Querier and IGMP Snooping Via aggregation of supporting ports the GS 4210 24P2S allows the operation of a high speed trunk to combine with multiple ports such as a 32Gbps fat pipe and supports fail over as well The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP feature is also included and used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain Efficient Traffic Control The GS 4210 24P2S is loaded with robust QoS features and powerful traffic management to enhance services to business class data voice and video solutions The functionality includes broadcast multicast unicast storm control per port bandwidth control 802 1p CoS IP DSCP QoS priority and remarking It guarantees the best performance at VoIP and video stream transmission and empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources 13 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Enhanced and Secure Management For efficient management the GS 4210 24P2S is equipped with console Web Telnet and SNMP management interfaces With the built in Web based management interface the GS 4210 24P2S offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility By suppo
248. r has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports Note The PoE Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection making sure the manager PC must be set on the same IP subnet address as the PoE Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the PoE Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the PoE Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 1 1 Web Management B Logging on the PoE Managed Switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 8 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 0 100 36 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of PoE Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears e PLANET LETS IER
249. ration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration Default Disabled Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 Minutes e Day Select the starting day e Week Select the starting week number e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Day Select the starting day e Week Select the starting week number e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Year Select the starting Year e Month Select the starting month e Date Select the starting date e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute 49 e Non recurring To Button Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S e Year Select the starting Year e Month Select the starting month e Date Select the starting date e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute System Time Information 08 44 02 DFL UTC 8 Jan 01 2000 Dayligh Saving Time Omer fom Oo AAA FF The page includes the following fields Object Current Date Time SNTP Time Zone Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time Offset From To Figure 4 2 7 Time Information Page Screenshot Description Display the current date
250. rce IP Address e Source IP Address Value e Source IP Wildcard Mask e Destination IP Address e Destination IP Address Value e Destination IP Wildcard Mask e Source Port User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Select ACL name for this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE B Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned B Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Specify the protocol filter for this ACE B Any IP No protocol filter is specified B Select from list If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and select protocol for this drop down list B Protocol ID to match If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and set currect protocol ID Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE B Any No source IP address filter is specified B User Defined If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the source IP address filter you can enter a specific source IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value When User Defined is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the Destination IP address filter for this
251. reenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e VLAN Select VLAN for this drop down list e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface Buttons View Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries 252 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S MAC Address VLAN Type Pot Ca 9C 0C SIE DOD Default 1 GE24 Add to Static MAC table Total Entries 1 Figure 4 11 8 MAC Address Information Page Screenshot Object Description e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e Port The ports that are members of the entry Button Add to Static MAC table Click to add dynamic MAC address to static MAC address 4 11 5 RMA Setting Reserved MAC Addresses Reserved MAC Addresses setting are shown on this page This page provides Peer Bridge and Discard in Action mode for specific MAC address The Reserved MAC Addresses setting screens in Figure 4 11 9 amp Figure 4 11 10 appear Reserved MAC Addresses Reserved MAC Addresses Setting MAC Address Select MAC Address Apply Figure 4 11 9 Reserved MAC Addresses Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Select MAC Address from this drop down lis
252. rol system Wireless LAN Access Points Museum Sightseeing Airport Hotel Campus Factory Warehouse can install the Access Point any where with no hesitation IP Surveillance Enterprise Museum Campus Hospital Bank can install IP Camera without limits of install location no need electrician to install AC sockets POE Splitter POE Splitter split the PoE 52V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5 12V DC power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time High Power PoE Splitter High PoE Splitter split the PoE 52V DC over the Ethernet cable into 24 12V DC power output lt frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time High Power Speed Dome This state of the art design is considerable to fit in various network environments like traffic centers shopping malls railway stations warehouses airports and production facilities for the most demanding outdoor surveillance applications no need electrician to install AC sockets Since the GS 4210 24P2S PoE Managed Switch per PoE port supports 52V DC PoE power output please check and assure the Powered Device s PD acceptable DC power range is from 52V DC otherwise it will damage the Powered Device PD 289 User s Manual of GS 4
253. rom the flash file system Syntax delete backup config flash startup config system image x Example GS 4210 24P2S delete backup config GS 4210 24P2S delete flash GS 4210 24P2S delete startup config GS 4210 24P2S delete system image O GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 7 disable command Description Turn off privileged mode command Syntax disable Example GS 4210 24P2S disable GS 4210 24P2S gt 6 2 8 end command Description End current mode and change to enable mode Syntax end Example GS 4210 24P2S config end GS 4210 24P2S 320 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 9 exit command Description Exit current mode and down to previous mode Syntax exit Example GS 4210 24P2S exit GS 4210 24P2S gt 6 2 10 no command Description Negate command Syntax no debug acl all common reserve user defined Example GS 4210 24P2S no debug acl all GS 4210 24P2S no debug acl common GS 4210 24P2S no debug acl reserve GS 4210 24P2S no debug acl user defined GS 4210 24P2S 321 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 2 11 ping command Description Send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts Syntax ping HOSTNAME Host name Example GS 4210 24P2S gt ping 192 168 0 100 PING 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192 168 0 100 icmp_seg 0 ttl 64 time 0 0 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 100 icmp_seg 1 ttl 64 time 0 0 ms 64 bytes from
254. rt Location Table Figure 4 12 23 LLDP MED Port Location Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Coordinate Display the current coordinate e Civic Address Display the current civic address e ESC ELIN Display the current ESC ELIN 276 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 12 8 LLDP Overloading The LLDP Port Overloading screen in Figure 4 12 24 appears LLDP Port Overloading LLDP Port Overloading Table Not 1 r y cer 1426 Overloading 1 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 1 0 Transmitte d m 14 Transmitte d aux 8 Transmitted Not A GE2 1426 Overloading 21 Transmitted 8 Transmitted 10 Transmitte d mI 14 Transmitte d aM 8 Transmitted o 10 Transmitte d A 14 Transmitte d 8 Transmitted Not f GE 4 1426 Overloading 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 1 0 Transmitte d 14 Transmitte d az 8 Transmitted 1 Transmitte d Not 1426 Overloading 1 Transmitted 8 Transmitted Ld 14 Transmitte d MER 8 Transmitted Not I f GE6 mo Overloading 21 Transmitted 8 Transmitted 10 Transmitte d m 14 Transmitte d mM 8 Transmitted Not GE 1426 Overloading 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 1 0 Transmitte d 14 Transmitte d pst 8 Transmitted GES 62 1426 pan ETTER 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 10 Transmitte d 14 Transmitte d EN 8 Transmitted 10 Transmitte d 14 Transmitte
255. rt Select e MED Enable e MED Optional TVLs e MED Network Policy Button Apply Click to apply changes Description Select port for this drop down list Enable or disable MED configuration Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of advertised messages Network Policy This option advertises network policy configuration information aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption Location This option advertises location identification details Inventory This option advertises device details useful for inventory management such as manufacturer model software version and other pertinent information Select MED network policy for this drop down list 273 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S LLDP MED Port Setting Table em deme fresa Gg eum e O ww cnp jew pe e w Gu emm e A wo em jew e o e w cm eum m mw wo sg jew e we om mw e did oe eme ives w w om jew CS CTI COM cu jeep A ema few e did BEE Enabled Yes Ma Ma ea jew e Sidi cns Eee m w w joes jew CSS EEES CIS CON cnr Eee e w w cm TITO CADA CA w cu
256. rt VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch EN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device 102 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged
257. rt error disabled function to check status by self loop Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by broadcast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unknown multicast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unicast flood e ACL Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ACL e Port Security Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by port security Violation violation Button Apply DHCP Rate Limit ARP Rate Limt Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by DHCP rate limit Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ARP rate limit Click to apply changes Error Disable Information Figure 4 3 14 Error Disabled Information Page Screenshot 84 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Recovery Interval Display the current recovery interval time e BPDU Guard Display the current BPDU guard status e Self Loop Display the current self loop status e Broadcast Flood Display the current broadcst flood status e Unknown Multicast Flood Display the current unknown multicast flood status e Unicast Flood Display the current unicast flood status e ACL Display the current ACL status e Port Security Violation Display the current port security violation status
258. rt level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address 120 except by setting priority below Priority Hello Time Maximum Age Timer Forward Delay Timer User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the
259. rting standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the switch can be managed via any standard management software For text based management the switch can be accessed via Telnet and the console port Moreover the GS 4210 24P2S offers secure remote management by supporting HTTPS and SNMPv3 connections which encrypt the packet content at each session Powerful Security PLANET GS 4210 24P2S offers comprehensive Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address TCP UDP ports or defined typical network applications Its protection mechanism also comprises 802 1X port based authentication which can be deployed with RADIUS to ensure the port level security and block illegal users The Port Security allows limiting the number of users on a given port The network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before Flexible Extension Solution The two mini GBIC slots built in the GS 4210 24P2S are compatible with the 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber transceiver to uplink to backbone switch and monitor center in long distance The distance can be extended from 550 meters to 2km multi mode fiber up to above 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for applications withi
260. s Disabled e Querier Version Sets the querier version for compatibility with other devices on the network Version 2 or 3 Default v2 Button Appl PP Click to apply changes IGMP Querier Status Figure 4 7 11 IGMP Querier Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Querier State Display the current querier state e Querier Status Display the current querier stauts e Querier Version Display the current querier version e Querier IP Display the current querier IP 149 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 7 2 3 IGMP Static Group Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in above sections For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the PoE Managed Switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Static multicast addresses are never aged out When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN The IGMP Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4 7 12 amp Figure 4 7 13 appear IGMP Static Group Add IGMP Static Group V LAM ID Select VLANs Add Figure 4 7 12 Add IGMP Static Group Page Screenshot
261. s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 132 3 QUES Se MINS a era a aah AN ea 167 4 9 2 4 Go5 MAIN ee ee eae 168 2032 DS CR IMAN to ll dd rd de Mia DELI 169 4 8 2 6 IP Precedence Mapping siii A A A A A 172 AO AOS BaSe MOS a O 174 2 0 94GlIoBDal SeHllgs tata id dl secet is dus 174 AA A NOR 175 4 8 4 QoS Advanced MOGG cio aaa aii 177 MEE A A 177 4 o 42 Glass A e 178 ASAS Agora galo POCO ria 179 ABA dad PONCY TADIG ENERO 180 4 0 4 5 Pole Class Maps eon is tiep ot dois el DCUM D o EL Nd MM IM UL D ee a 181 ALSO Policy BINAINO ust iei tendon e eoe t N rb dicet os ise IET 183 o TTE NET 185 4 8 5 1 Ingress Bandwidth Control essssssssssssessssseeeeeen nennen nennen nnne n nennen nnne nnns nnn nnne nnns 185 2 90 52 Ingress VEAN SeUINOS onec De o a O UA ann 187 4 0 5 3 Egress Bandwidth Co ee m eps dU RE EM 188 4 0 Egiess Queue SellllgSs 5 2 2 o a cid usd cue 190 BS SOC UMC e 192 O A OT Emm 192 49 MEE elei S eling ea e A A iS 192 AA A 193 A atr dec NE E E A E E HE 195 4 9 2 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication o ccconccconccccccncconcnonncnconcnnnnacononcnnnncnnnnannnnanoss 196 AO 22 B02 E 199 492 3 902 KRONE SUING 5i A E A A AEE 200 492A GUES VEAN Sein si a E el aos 202 ASE CSG AOS rd 205 AUS DAGA SNOOP IN Grex dit A AS 206 49 3 1 DHCP Snooping Overview 1 A A A AAA A 206 A932 E a a a aa 207
262. s classified to VLANs that it is not a member of e Uplink Enable disable uplink function in trunk port e TPID Configure the type TPID of the protocol of switch trunk port Button Appl PP Click to apply changes Port VLAN Status GE1 Trunk E Trunk E3 Trunk E4 Trunk MEN A M Q m ES Trunk E Trunk Q co ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Q mim ho m Din i D 5 f ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Figure 4 5 4 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot 105 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields 4 5 5 Port to VLAN Object Accepted Frame Type Port Interface VLAN Mode PVID Ingress Filtering Uplink TPID Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current interface VLAN mode Display the current PVID Display the current access frame type Display the current ingress filtering Display the current uplink mode Display the current TPID Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index This Page allows for adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears Port to VLAN Portto VLAN Settings VLAN ID 1 v A A C Trunk Forbidden Excluded Tagged
263. s is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions B Forward Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action B Discard If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port it will trigger the action that do not learn the new MAC and drop the package B Discard SNMP Log If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port it will trigger the action that do not learn the new MAC and drop the package Also appears under SNMP and System log 219 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B Discard SNMP Log Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 2 Click the Reopen button Also appears under SNMP and System log e Trap Frequency sec Allow to input the seconds for trap frequency Button Appl PP Click to apply changes Port Security Status Figure 4 9 30 Port Security Status Page Scre
264. s the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list 193 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S e Port State Enable or disable the storm control status for the given storm type e Action Configures the action performed when storm control is over rate on a port Valid values are Shutdown or Drop e Type Enable The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here B Broadcast B Unknown Multicast B Unknown Unicast e Rate kbps pps Configure the rate for the storm control The default value is 10 000 and unit is 16Kbps Button Apply Click to apply changes Storm Control Information adcast 16Kbps Unknown Multicast ps Unknown Unicast 16Kbps Off 10000 Off 10000 Off 1 0000 Off 10000 Off 1000 Off 1000 Off 1000 Off 1000 Off 1000 Off 1000 Off 1000 Off 1000 1000 10000 1000 10000 1000 10000 1000 100003 1000 100007 1000 100007 1000 100007 Port State Br GE10 disabled Off GE11 disabled Off GE12 disabled Off GE13 disabled Of GE14 disabled Of GEI5 disabled Off GEB disabled Of 0000 10000 1000 1000 1000 1000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 um a Drop i Drop c ce co Drop Drop coy oO BE go aa Cy uma c Au M in We go oOo y o o O O A o Drop
265. s with slower media The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP Compatible RSTP Operation and MSTP Operation Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used The values allowed are between 0 and 65535 The default value is O STP Information Information Name T BPDU Forward Cost Method Force Version Confiquration Name Configuration Revision The page includes the following fields Object STP BPDU Forward Cost Method Force Version Configuration Name Configuration Revision RSTP Operation MAA Figure 4 6 5 STP Information Page Screenshot Description Display the current STP state Display the current BPDU forward mode Display the current cost method Display the current force version Display the current configuration name Display the current configuration revision 125 4 6 3 STP Port Setting User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S This page allows you to configure per port STP settings The STP Port Setting screens in Figure 4 6 6 amp Figure 4 6 7 appear STP Port Setting STP Port Setting Port Select PEL a Edge Port BPDU Filter BPDU Guard P2P MAC Apply The page includes the following fields Object Port Select External Cost 0 Auto Edge Port BPDU Filter BPDU Guard P2P MAC Migrate Figure 4 6 6 STP Port Configuration Page Screenshot Descri
266. sage Display the log message Buttons Clear buffered messages Click to clear the log Refresh Click to refresh the log 57 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 2 6 SNMP Management 4 2 6 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related ma
267. sertions Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Deletions Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Drops Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full e Age Outs Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Buttons Clear l A Click to clear the statistics Retresh Click to refresh the statistics LLDP Port Statistics Figure 4 12 26 LLDP Port Statistics Page Screenshot 279 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e TX Frame Total e RX Frame Total e RX Frame Discarded e RX Frame Errors e RX TLVs Discarded e RXTLVs Unrecognized e RX Ageout Total User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Each LLDP frame can contain
268. sing Threshold Rising threshold value 0 2147483647 e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value 0 2147483647 e Rising Event Event to fire when the rising threshold is crossed e Falling Event Event to fire when the falling threshold is crossed e Owner Specify an owner for the alarm Button Apply Click to apply changes RMON Alarm Sample Sample Sample Sample Rising Falling Rising Falling Action Port Variable Interval Type Threshold Threshold Event Event Figure 4 15 6 RMON Alarm Status Page Screenshot 296 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Page includes the following fields Object Index Sample Port Sample Variable Sample Interval Sample Type Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Falling Event Owner Action 4 15 5 RMON History Configure RMON History table on this Page The RMON History screens in Figure 4 15 7 amp Figure 4 15 8 appear RMON History Description Indicates the index of Alarm control entry Display the current sample port Display the current sample variable Display the current interval Display the current sample type Display the current rising threshold Display the current falling threshold Display the current rising event Display the current falling event Display the current owner Click Delete to delete RMON alarm entry RMON History Settings Figure 4 15 7 RMON History Table Page Screenshot 297 The Page includes the following f
269. sseeeeeeeeeceensseeeeseeeceensneeeeeeeeeoenssseeeeeeeeooessneeesessooeennes 33 3 0 PLANET Smart Discovery UUllly i cei tai 34 4 WEB CONFIGURATION i iscsast it eua ees nica SESaR Cua Eneas asian sns Edanaua eias cesi Cuspeup Sa Raua a Sen cuatEa d 36 AMAN WED eee S 39 AA DIV A doc 41 4 1 2 Configuration Mana gesta dd dia 41 AA 2 SAVING CONGA UON teta eolica 42 AZ SYSTEM sasaaa aaa A A aaa ai aAa aa 44 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S A ESA A O 44 42 2P A O 45 4 2 9 User CONAGUA ld ere ld o ld ee 47 2 2 AA e II A 48 7 Ae E ec ee er eC ne a ee UE M 48 ALA Z ON TP CONNU AON stat o dl iris 51 ALONSO Manageme Ni EE TOO A E 52 4201 LOGGING SEVICE EMPIRE TORTE E 52 B22 POCA A Mtr a LT o3 2 2 5 9 Remote SV S100 op te co e o ee esu A LM C E 54 2 cdi delete cioe RT T 56 426 oNMEManagemen Eiusiciomicaanisia tilda 58 AS ADS A A A wt ad aa ca e M lt ce at I I Cue 58 2 2 9 2 SNMP SONG secolo dete tetra cesses fecic b ei 59 M2 O IN VION e T 60 4 2 6 4 SNMP Access Group Mp ad 61 A20 SNMP COMMUNN Y a a o a o a o a Bad 63 42 NS A a A E T E 64 4 20 71 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients is ete Ure iae e a ai ae e aS 66 4 2 6 8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients ooocccocccccocccccoccccoccnconcnnnnnnononnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonn
270. steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the PoE Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 1 6 25 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S En 1 La Figure 2 1 6 Mounting PoE Managed Switch in a Rack Step6 Proceeds with Steps 4 and 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the PoE Managed Switch 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the PoE Managed Switch as the Figure 2 1 7 shows 124 MGB SXILX 2 f LC Fiber Cable Figure 2 1 7 Plug In the SFP Transceiver 26 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S B Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET PoE Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Gigabit SFP Transceiver Modules B MGB GT SFP Port 1000Base T Module MGB SX SFP Port 1000Base SX mini GBIC module MGB LX SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 10KM MGB L30 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 30KM MGB L50 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 50KM MGB L70 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 70KM
271. t Intranet Supplicant Client with 802 1X authentication Figure 4 9 5 e Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification e Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the 196 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifyi
272. t e Action Select Peer Bridge and Discard for specific MAC address 253 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Button Appl PP Click to apply changes Reserved MAC Addresses Config Figure 4 11 10 Reserved MAC Addresses StatusPage Screenshot E bject e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Action Display current Action mode e Delete Delet Click S1616 to delete Reserved MAC Addresses status entry 254 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 12 LLDP 4 12 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify tro
273. t index for this drop down list to create new index or modify index e Index Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are B None The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol SNMP Trap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol B Log and Trap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal e Community Specify the community when trap is sent default is public e Owner Indicates the owner of this event the string length is from O to 31 default is a null string 292 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S e Description Indicates description of this event the string length is from O to 127 default is a null string Button Appl PP Click to apply changes RMON Event Figure 4 15 3 RMON Event Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current event index e Event Type Display the current event type e Community Display the current community for SNMP trap e Description Display the current event description e Last Sent Time Display the current last sent time e Owner Display the current event owner e Action Click Delete to delete RMON event entry 4 15 3 RMON Event Log This Page pr
274. tatic MAC Setting 00 00 00 00 00 00 Detault 1 Y Add Figure 4 11 1 Static MAC Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e Port Select port for this drop down list e VLAN Select VLAN for this drop down list Button Add Click to add new static MAC address 249 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Static MAC Status Figure 4 11 2 Static MAC Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e Port Display the current port e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry i Delete Click to delete static MAC status entry 4 11 2 MAC Filtering By filtering MAC address the switch can easily filter the per configured MAC address and reduce the un safety The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 3 amp Figure 4 11 4 appear MAC Filtering MAC Filtering Setting MAC Address VLAN 1 4054 00 00 00 00 00 00 Add Figure 4 11 3 MAC Filtering Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN 1 4094 Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Button Add Click to add new MAC filtering setting 250 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Static MAC Status Figure 4 11 4 Statics MAC St
275. that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured Default is O The secret key up to 128 characters long shared between the RADIUS server and the switch 229 Mew Radius Server User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S By P address By name 1812 O 65535 1813 0 65535 1 0 55535 Login 802 1 All Add The page includes the following fields Object Server Definition Server IP Authetication Port Acct Port Key String Timeout for Reply Figure 4 9 43 New Radius Server Page Screenshot Description Set the server definition Address of the Radius server IP name The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server Range 0 65535 The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server Range 0 65535 The shared key shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch The Timeout which can be set to a number between 1 and 30 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are usin
276. the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s The QoS page of the PoE Managed Switch contains three types of QoS mode the 802 1p mode DSCP mode or Port base mode can be selected Both the three mode rely on predefined fields within the packet to determine the output queue E 802 1p Tag Priority Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the IEEE 802 1p VLAN priority tag B IP DSCP Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the TOS or DSCP field in the IP packets E Port Base Priority Mode Any packet received from the specify high priority port will treated as a high priority packet The PoE Managed Switch supports eight priority level queue the queue service rate is based on the WRR Weight Round Robin and WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing alorithm The WRR ratio of high priority and low priority can be set to 4 1 and 8 1 163 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 8 2 General 4 8 2 1 QoS Properties The QoS Global Setting and Information screen in Figure 4 8 1 amp Figure 4 8 2 appear QoS Global Setting QoS Global Setting Gos Mode Disable Basic Advanced Figure 4 8 1 QoS Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Enable or disable QoS mode Button Apply Click to apply changes QoS Information Figure 4 8 2 QoS Information Page Screenshot The pag
277. the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VolP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user id
278. the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network 338 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 339 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 7 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mod
279. thentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 198 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 2 2 802 1X Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X authentication system The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Security802 1X Access Control gt 802 1X Setting page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below The 802 1X Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 7 amp Figure 4 9 8 appear 02 1x Setting 802 1x Setting 2 Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 9 7 802 1X Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Enable or disable the 802 1x func
280. ther permit or deny e When the access mode is set to permit multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range e When the access mode is set to deny multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range 4 7 5 1 Multicast Profile Setting The Add Profile and Profile Status screens in Figure 4 7 24 amp Figure 4 7 25 appear Multicast Profile Setting Add Profile Permit Deny Add Figure 4 7 24 Add Profile Setting Page Screenshot 160 The page includes the following fields Object e IP Type e Profile Index e Group from e Group to e Action User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Select IPv4 for this drop down list Indicates the ID of this particular profile the available range is 1 to 128 Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering a start IP address Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering an end IP address Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny Multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range Deny When the access mode is set to multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range Click to add multicast profile entry Button Add IGMP Profile Status Fi
281. ticast traffic Action Drop flood or send to router port e Pv4 Forward Method Configure the IPv4 multicast fordward method Options are MAC or Src Dst Ip Button Appl Pp Click to apply changes 142 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Properties Information Figure 4 7 2 Properties Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e L2 Unknow Multicast Display the current L2 unknown multicast action status Action e IP Uknown Multicast Display the current IP unknown multicast action status Action e Forward Method For IPv4 Display the current IPv4 multicast forward method 4 7 2 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active I
282. tings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Button Apply Session ID Monitor Session State Destination Port Allow ingress Sniffer RX Ports Sniffer TX Ports Click to apply changes Description Set the port mirror session ID Possible ID are 1 to 4 Enable or disable the port mirroring function Select the port to mirror destination port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Frames received at these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Frames transmitted from these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored 81 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S M AA I AA MN fA BA NA MA Figure 4 3 10 Mirroring Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Session ID Display the session ID e Destination Port This is the mirroring port entry e Ingress State Display the ingress state e Source TX Port Display the current TX ports e Source RX Port Display the current RX ports 4 3 5 Jumbo Frame This page provides to select the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port The Jumbo Frame screen in Figure 4 3 11 amp Figure 4 3 12 appear Jumbo Frame Jumbo Frame Setting Apply Figure 4 3 11 Jumbo Frame Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Obje
283. tion and default is disable Button Apply Click to apply changes 802 1x Information 802 1X Disabled Figure 4 9 8 802 1X Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Display the current 802 1X state 199 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 9 2 3 802 1X Port Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X Port Setting The 802 1X Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 9 amp Figure 4 9 10 appear 02 1x Port Setting 802 1x Port Setting Select Ports hd No Authentication 7 DIE Disable Enable r 3600 Range 30 65535 Default 3600 E Range O 65535 Default BD 30 Range 1 65535 Default 30 Retries 2 Range 1 10 Default 2 Apply Figure 4 9 9 802 1X Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e Mode If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available No Authentication B Authentication B Force Unauthorized B In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access B Force Author
284. tion list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 228 4 9 7 RADIUS Server User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 42 Figure 4 9 43 amp Figure 4 9 44 appears Use Default Parameters Radius Server Settings IP Version Version B Version 4 es Timeout for Reply 3 Dead Time Key String Apply The page includes the following fields Range 1 10 Default 3 sec Range 1 30 Default 3 min Range 0 2000 Default 0 in 28 ASCI Alphanumeric Characters Used Figure 4 9 42 Radius Server Setting Page Screenshot Object Button Apply Retries Timeout for Reply Dead Time Key String Click to apply changes Description Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request Default is 3 Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 30 a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead Default is 3 The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 2000 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server
285. tion type information e VLAN ID Display current VLAN ID information e VLAN Type Display current VLAN Type information e User Priority Display current user priority information e DSCP Display current DSCP information 267 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 12 5 LLDP Remote Device This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP remive devices The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Remive Device screen in Figure 4 12 17 appears LLDP Remote Device Detail Delete Refresh Sel Local Port Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID Port ID Subtype PortID System Name Time to Live Figure 4 12 17 LLDP Remote Device Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Sel Disaply current sel information e Local Port Display the current local port e Chassis ID Subtype Display the current chassis ID subtype e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID subtype e Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Time to Live Display the current time to live Buttons Delete Click to delete LLDP remote device entry Refresh l Click to refresh LLDP remote device 268 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 12 6 MED Network Policy Network Policy Discovery enables
286. to 24 PoE in line power interfaces the GS 4210 24P2S PoE Managed Switch can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP Camera system AP group for the enterprise For instance 24 camera AP can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office Without the power socket limitation the GS 4210 24P2S PoE Managed Switch makes the installation of cameras or WLAN AP more easily and efficiently Use the PoE sub menu items to configure the PoE function of the GS 4210 24P2S PoE Managed Switch Under PoE sub menu the following topics are provided to configure and view the PoE Setting This section has the following items B PoE Global Setting B PoE Port Setting B PoE Delay Setting 4 14 1 PoE Global Setting This page allows adjusting the PoE budget and viewing PoE operation status and PoE chipset temperature The PoE Global Setting screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears PoE Global Setting PoE Global Setting 300watts Apply Figure 4 14 1 PoE Global Setting Page Screenshot Button Appl maie Click to apply changes 284 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The page includes the following fields Object Description e Maximum PoE Budget Allow assign PoE Budget to the PoE Managed Switch The range is 0 300 watts watts and default is 300 watts e Systsem Operation Display current system operation status Status e Power A
287. tur e reda assibus dr Cede edi itk Lega De aaeeea 329 oe OO COMME a re 330 AO AA e ee eee 330 6 9 19 jumbosrame NA o ces etu tune 331 6 9 019 12 COMM ANN AAA A A A 331 09 20 Fee 6 Go a a a ar a 6 eec Pee 331 0 30 21 dd COMME UEM 331 0 922 89 Ols ailiatcl 1 oO er eer eh tT tre ree ee ne ee en ee ee ee eee 331 625 2 SIGS Command stats EET E 332 0 3 24 1099 M9 Command 2 o a a o o o oc dd 332 0 329 Mac COMMANG eoe ccu cc 332 6 9 26 management LAN COPIA dt utu eid dcus ILLU 332 GS 2C e AAA O E nn A O 333 o alo ss eer areca stern hare ats risdup eee tert ee eee etre Mr we ee ud ee nee ene elena eee ria nee eee ene een ae 333 6 929 POllcya Map COMM andate See ace 333 6 39 50 POM SECUMILY COMMA puerro as 333 629 3 GOS Command nt dr lib 334 opone z radius COMME 334 ome dE urs tas COMMAND iaa 334 03 94 MON COMMON dj c bur lor s ticle dsc LUE DL CDM ie nta 334 6 9739 SMM COMIMANG Los ioaas ursi etate ta lidiar stated 335 03 90 51 COMMAND 335 6 3 57 spanhibg iree CODmimialid res ias diia 335 OSSO SIOFN COMEON COM MaN disipar 336 09 99 System COMINO ti 336 03 40ta caes Comman renan rrr enema S 336 03 41 idle COMME waned aetna bane 336 6 3 AZ 1SsSi ame COMMANG jan epee 337 Ce VAI COMMA A A A A A O 337 6 3 AA VOCE Van COMMING sical EN 337 T SWITCH OPEBRATION a aaa aAa 338 VE nct cece a 338 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S A
288. ual of GS 4210 24P2S APPENDIX A A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T 1 BI_DA BI DB 2 BI DA BI DB 3 BI DB BI DA 4 BI DC BI DD 5 BI DC BI DD 6 BI DB BI DA 7 BI DD BI DC 8 BI DD BI DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependent Interface Media Dependent Interface Cross Tx transmit Tx transmit Rx receive Tx transmit 344 The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight through Cable 12 3 4 5 67 8 SIDE 1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Crossover Cable 12 3 4 5 67 8 SIDE 1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2
289. ubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 12 2 LLDP Global Setting This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Global Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 12 1 amp Figure 4 12 2 appear LLDP Global Setting LLDP Global Settings Enabled Disabled O Filtering O Bridging Flooding 30 5 32758 2 10 2 1 10 1 81 92 J 1 10 Apply Figure 4 12 1 LLDP Global Setting Page Screenshot 255 The page includes the following fields Object e Enable e LLDP PDU Disable Action e Transmission Interval e Holdtime Multiplier e Reinitialization Delay e Transmit Delay e LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S Description Enable or disable LLDP globally function Set LLDP PDU disable action include Filtering Bridging and Flooding B Filtering discrad all LLDP PDU B Bridging transmit LLDP PDU in the same VLAN B Flooding transmit LLDP PDU for all port The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Trans
290. ugh not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated VLAN Overview PF P aa A AA AA A A G A o o o o A o o o o l l l E po jg 4 i l I i 1 i i L i o I 1 LN p 1 I 1 l I 1 I i d i I I l l y f l y 1 I I i i I l i PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 E 1 PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 1 Untagged Untagged Tagged y Untagged Untagged Tagged i I i L i l n 1 I VLAN 2 a VLAN 3 J i J A dy 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN The PoE Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The PoE Managed Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports
291. umerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering 103 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced Edit Interface Setting The Edit Interface Setting Status screens in Figure 4 5 3 amp Figure 4 5 4 appear Interface Settings Edit Interface Setting Port Select Interface VLAN Mode PVID Accepted Type EE Uplink TPID Select Ports S Hybrid Access Trunk 1 a all O Tag Only Enabled Enabled Tunnel 4094 Untag Only Disabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 5 3 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the
292. ures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used E The unique switch identifier E The path cost to the root associated with each switch port B The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information El The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch m The path cost to the root from the transmitting port 118 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S a The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUS results in the following B One switch is elected as the root switch E The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch E A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root ir A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch
293. us Syntax show version Example GS 4210 24P2S gt show version Loader Version 2011 12 41872 Loader Date May 22 2014 19 28 43 Firmware Version v1 0b140611 Firmware Date Wed Jun 11 10 13 28 CST 2014 Magic Number 83800000 GS 4210 24P2S gt 313 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 6 1 5 traceroute command Description Trace route to network hosts Syntax traceroute HOSTNAME The IP address or hostname address to trace Example GS 4210 24P2S gt traceroute 192 168 0 100 6 2 Privileged Mode Commands 6 2 1 clear command clear arp Description Clear entries in the ARP cache Syntax clear arp A B C D IP address to clear clear arp the entire ARP cache is cleared Example GS 4210 24P2S clear arp 192 168 0 100 GS 4210 24P2S GS 4210 24P2S clear arp GS 4210 24P2S clear GVRP Description Clear the GVRP configuration Syntax clear GVRP error statistics GVRP Error Statistics information clear GVRP statistics GVRP Statistics information Example GS 4210 24P2S clear gvrp error statistics GS 4210 24P2S clear gvrp statistics GS 4210 24P2S 314 clear interfaces Description Clear the Interface status and configuration Syntax clear interface LAG lt 1 8 gt counters clear interfaces GigabitEthernet lt 1 26 gt counters Example GS 4210 24P2S clear interfaces lag 1 counters GS 4210 24P2S clear interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 counters GS 4210 24P2S
294. w control function 12 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S ser fe eme foom fae em pem pem eee fen eme pow me em pee pee ses fen eme foom awe em pee pem sem fen eme pw awe m penes pene sen fen eme foom a em pee pem sem fen eme foom awe em pee pem Figure 4 3 2 Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Click Edit to indicate the port name e Enable State Display the current port state e Link Status Display the current link status e Speed Display the current speed status of the port e Duplex Display the current duplex status of the port e Flow Control Display the current flow control configuration of the port Configuration e Flow Control Status Display the current flow control status of the port 73 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S 4 3 2 Port Counters This page provides an overview of traffic and trunk statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 3 3 Figure 4 3 4 Figure 4 3 5 Figure 4 3 6 appear Port Counters Port MIB Counters Settings All Interface Etherlike RMON Figure 4 3 3 Port MIB Counters Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number for this drop down list e Mode Select port counters mode Options All e Interface e Etherlike e RMON GET MIB Counters Clear
295. were dropped due to lack of resources B Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits B Pkts The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received and transmitted B BroadcastPkts The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets B MulticastPkKts The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address B CRCAlignErrors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors B UnderSizePkts The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed B OverSizePkts The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed B Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error B Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error B Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment B Pkts64Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted th
296. work It offers intelligent Layer 2 data packet switching and management functions friendly web user interface and stable operation The model complies with IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet Plus PoE at an affordable price The GS 4210 24P2S is equipped with 24 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet ports and 2 100 1000Base X SFP interfaces with inner power system lts 24 Gigabit Ethernet ports are integrated with 802 3at PoE injector function on all ports It offers a rack mountable affordable safe and reliable power solution for SMBs deploying Power over Ethernet networks or requiring enhanced data security and network traffic management IEEE 802 3at af Compliant Power Source Switch The PoE in line power following the IEEE 802 3at af standard makes the GS 4210 24P2S able to deliver Gigabit speed data and up to 30 watts of power per port to 24 PoE compliant powered devices PDs with a combined power output budget of up to 300 watts The GS 4210 24P2S provides more flexibility in power requirement for all kinds of PDs with affordable installation costs High performance Switch Architecture The GS 4210 24P2S provides 24 10 100 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports and 2 100 1000Base X SFP slots It boasts a high performance switch architecture capable of providing the non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 52Gbps which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to increasing bandwidth demands Robust Laye
297. y The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application The ACL page contains links to the following main topics m MAC Based ACL Configuration MAC based ACL setting B MAC Based ACE Add Edit Delete the MAC based ACE Access Control Entry setting B IPv4 Based ACL Configuration IPv4 based ACL setting E IPv4 Based ACE Add Edit Delete the IPv4 based ACE Access Control Entry setting a ACL Binding Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port 4 10 1 MAC Based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations MAC Based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 1 amp Figure 4 10 2 appear MAC Based ACL MAC Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 1 MAC Based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a named MAC based ACL list Button Add Click to add MAC Based ACL setting 238 User s Manual of GS 4210 24P2S ACL Table Figure 4 10 2 MAC Based ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Delete Click to delete ACL name entry 4 10 2 MAC Based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The MAC Base
298. y the current periodic reauthentication Reauthentication Reauthentication Period Quiet Period Supplicant Timeout Max EAP Requests Modity Display the current reauthentication period Display the current quiet period Display the current supplicant timeout Display the current Max EAP requests Edit Click to edit 802 1X port setting parameter 4 9 2 4 Guest VLAN Setting Overview When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meantime the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Succ

User`s Manual of Layer 2 Management 802.3at PoE Switch

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents